kÉï=~ë=çÑW=
MRKOMNN
páêçå~=aÉåí~ä=`^aL`^j=póëíÉã
áåi~Ä=Pa
léÉê~íçêDë=ã~åì~ä
pçÑíï~êÉ=îÉêëáçå=PKUR
båÖäáëÜ=ErpF
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Table of contents
Operator's manual
Table of contents
1
2
3
Introduction...............................................................................................................
17
1.1
Dear Customer, .............................................................................................
17
1.2
Copyright and trademark...............................................................................
17
1.3
General information.......................................................................................
18
1.3.1 Structure of the document..................................................................
18
1.3.1.1
Identification of danger levels.........................................................
18
1.3.1.2
Formats and symbols used ............................................................
19
1.3.1.3
Conventions ...................................................................................
19
1.3.1.4
Formats of the manual ...................................................................
19
General safety information .......................................................................................
20
2.1
Indications for use .........................................................................................
20
2.2
Further use of Sirona Dental CAD/CAM System ..........................................
21
Software ...................................................................................................................
22
3.1
CEREC Biogeneric........................................................................................
22
3.2
System requirements ....................................................................................
22
3.3
Installing the software ...................................................................................
22
3.4
Downloading the software to the milling unit .................................................
23
3.5
Uninstalling the software ...............................................................................
24
3.6
Copy protection (softguard dongle) ...............................................................
24
3.6.1 Introduction ........................................................................................
24
3.6.2 Softguard dongle................................................................................
24
3.6.3 Connecting the softguard dongle .......................................................
25
3.6.4 Without softguard dongles .................................................................
25
Starting the software .....................................................................................
25
User interface ...........................................................................................................
26
4.1
Description of the user interface ...................................................................
26
4.2
Tool bar .........................................................................................................
27
4.3
View window .................................................................................................
29
4.3.1 Introduction ........................................................................................
29
4.3.2 Standard views...................................................................................
29
4.3.3 Zoom tool ...........................................................................................
30
3.7
4
2
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Operator's manual
4.3.4 Showing/hiding the neighboring teeth ...............................................
30
4.3.5 Showing/hiding the contact to the neighboring tooth (Contact).........
31
4.3.6 Cut tool ..............................................................................................
31
4.3.7 Showing/hiding the occlusion/articulation/gingival mask...................
32
4.3.8 Show/hide antagonist........................................................................
33
4.3.8.1
Interocclusal clearance..................................................................
34
4.3.8.2
Antagonist......................................................................................
34
4.3.8.3
Antagonist surface.........................................................................
35
4.3.8.4
Tools subgroup..............................................................................
36
4.4
View window in the design technique model................................................
37
4.5
Design window .............................................................................................
37
4.5.1 Editing tool (Edit)...............................................................................
38
4.5.1.1
Editing a construction line..............................................................
39
4.5.1.2
Changing a pontic..........................................................................
40
4.5.1.3
Changing the abutment coping......................................................
40
4.5.1.4
Changing connectors.....................................................................
41
4.5.1.5
Bridge construction (biogeneric, biogeneric reference, reduced,
multilayer)
41
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
4.5.2 Form tool (Form) ...............................................................................
42
4.5.2.1
Changing the size of the layer to be applied .................................
42
4.5.3 Wax drop (Drop)................................................................................
43
4.5.3.1
Modifying the wax drop size ..........................................................
43
4.5.3.2
Applying material ...........................................................................
43
4.5.3.3
Removing material.........................................................................
44
4.5.3.4
Blending material...........................................................................
44
4.5.4 Scaling tool (Scale) ...........................................................................
44
4.5.4.1
Activating the scaling function .......................................................
44
4.5.4.2
Scaling with inlays, onlays, crowns, veneers and bridge
biogenerics/biogeneric reference/reduced/multilayer
44
4.5.4.3
Scaling with crown framework restorations and abutment copings
of the bridge framework
46
4.5.4.4
Scaling with connectors and pontics .............................................
46
4.5.4.5
Exiting the scaling function ............................................................
48
4.5.5 Shaping tool (Shape) ........................................................................
48
4.5.5.1
Applying material along an open line.............................................
49
4.5.5.2
Applying material inside a closed area ..........................................
49
4.5.5.3
Smoothing an area ........................................................................
50
4.5.6 Reduce tool (Reduce) .......................................................................
50
4.5.7 Positioning tool (Position)..................................................................
50
05.2011
3
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Table of contents
4.5.8 Rotation tool (Rotate) .........................................................................
52
4.6
Status bar ......................................................................................................
53
4.7
Design window ..............................................................................................
54
4.7.1 Design window (3D viewer)................................................................
54
4.7.2 Scale ..................................................................................................
54
4.7.3 Coordinate system .............................................................................
54
Menu bar .......................................................................................................
55
4.8.1 Restoration menu...............................................................................
55
4.8.1.1
Creating a restoration.....................................................................
56
4.8.1.2
Loading a restoration......................................................................
58
4.8.1.3
Deleting a restoration .....................................................................
58
4.8.1.4
Exporting a restoration or scan data ..............................................
59
4.8.1.5
Importing a restoration or scan data...............................................
59
4.8.1.6
Managing patient data....................................................................
60
4.8.1.7
Sending a restoration .....................................................................
62
4.8.2 Design menu ......................................................................................
62
4.8.2.1
Change...........................................................................................
63
4.8.2.2
Quadrant ........................................................................................
63
4.8.2.3
Abutment crown .............................................................................
64
4.8.2.4
Editing the veneer structure ...........................................................
64
4.8.2.5
Pre-positioning tool.........................................................................
64
4.8.2.6
Center.............................................................................................
65
4.8.2.7
Insertion axis ..................................................................................
66
4.8.2.8
Correcting an optical impression ....................................................
66
4.8.3 Settings menu ....................................................................................
66
4.8.3.1
Parameters.....................................................................................
66
4.8.3.2
Instruments.....................................................................................
78
4.8.3.3
Configuration ..................................................................................
80
4.8.3.4
Calibration ......................................................................................
89
4.8.4 Window menu ....................................................................................
90
4.8.4.1
Display options ...............................................................................
90
4.8.4.2
Image catalog.................................................................................
91
4.8.4.3
3D Preview .....................................................................................
91
4.8.4.4
Cursor.............................................................................................
91
4.8.4.5
Distance .........................................................................................
91
4.8.5 “?” menu.............................................................................................
92
4.8.5.1
Help (online help) ...........................................................................
92
4.8.5.2
Info options.....................................................................................
92
4.8
4
Operator's manual
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Operator's manual
5
4.8.5.3
Softguard info ................................................................................
93
4.8.5.4
Info about program ........................................................................
93
Optical impression ...................................................................................................
94
5.1
Scans with inEos Blue..................................................................................
94
5.1.1 General .............................................................................................
94
5.1.1.1
Scan models..................................................................................
94
5.1.1.2
Focusing the image .......................................................................
95
5.1.1.3
Overlap area during acquisition.....................................................
95
5.1.1.4
Deleting images.............................................................................
95
5.1.1.5
Operating the foot switch...............................................................
95
5.1.2 Raster scans .....................................................................................
96
5.1.2.1
Preparing the model ......................................................................
96
5.1.2.2
Taking a scan ................................................................................
96
5.1.3 Free scans ........................................................................................
97
5.1.3.1
Preparing the model ......................................................................
97
5.1.3.2
Taking a scan ................................................................................
97
5.1.3.3
Performing detail scans .................................................................
99
5.1.4 Rotational scans................................................................................
99
5.1.4.1
Preparing the model ......................................................................
99
5.1.4.2
Taking a scan ................................................................................
99
5.1.5 Buccal image.....................................................................................
100
5.1.6 Acquiring impressions .......................................................................
100
Acquisitions with inEos.................................................................................
101
5.2.1 Top view scan ...................................................................................
101
5.2.1.1
Capturing the optical impression ...................................................
101
5.2.1.2
“Puzzle” dialog box ........................................................................
102
5.2.1.3
Missing images..............................................................................
102
5.2.1.4
Completing views ..........................................................................
102
5.2.1.5
Terminating the scan .....................................................................
102
5.2.2 Rotational scan .................................................................................
103
5.2.2.1
Capturing the optical impression ...................................................
103
5.2.2.2
Terminating the scan .....................................................................
103
5.2.3 Detail scan ........................................................................................
103
5.2.3.1
Capturing the optical impression ...................................................
103
5.2.3.2
Terminating the scan .....................................................................
103
5.2.4 Rotational scan in top view ...............................................................
104
5.2.4.1
Increasing the precision.................................................................
104
5.2.4.2
Capturing the optical impression ...................................................
104
5.2
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
5
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Table of contents
Operator's manual
5.2.4.3
5.3
Further information ......................................................................... 104
Optical impressions with the scanner (inLab, inLab MC XL)......................... 104
5.3.1 General information............................................................................ 104
5.3.2 15° scanning technique...................................................................... 105
5.3.3 45° scanning technique...................................................................... 105
5.3.4 Crown framework scanning technique ............................................... 106
5.3.5 15° scanning technique for quadrant restoration ............................... 106
5.3.6 Scanning antagonists......................................................................... 106
5.3.7 Scanning an occlusion ....................................................................... 107
5.3.8 Scanning WaxUp ............................................................................... 108
5.4
Optical impressions with the CEREC Bluecam ............................................. 109
5.4.1 Acquisition control .............................................................................. 109
5.4.2 Single optical impression ................................................................... 110
5.4.3 Supplementary optical impressions ................................................... 112
5.4.4 Angled optical impressions ................................................................ 113
5.4.5 Supplementary and angled optical impressions................................. 113
5.4.6 Optical impressions for quadrant restoration ..................................... 114
5.4.7 Acquiring end teeth ............................................................................ 114
5.4.8 Acquiring the antagonist..................................................................... 114
5.4.9 Veneer images ................................................................................... 115
5.4.10 Acquiring bridge preparations ............................................................ 115
5.5
Image fields ................................................................................................... 116
5.5.1 Image field of the preparation ............................................................ 116
5.5.2 Image field of the occlusion................................................................ 116
5.5.3 Image field of the buccal image ......................................................... 117
5.5.4 Image field of the gingiva ................................................................... 117
5.5.5 Image field of the antagonists ............................................................ 117
5.5.6 Image field of the articulation ............................................................. 117
5.6
Image catalog................................................................................................ 117
5.6.1 General information............................................................................ 117
5.6.2 Opening the image catalog ................................................................ 118
5.6.3 Design of the image catalog............................................................... 119
5.6.4 Redefining the reference optical impression ...................................... 120
5.6.5 Active region ...................................................................................... 120
5.6.6 Zooming in ......................................................................................... 121
5.6.7 Changing the assignment .................................................................. 121
5.6.8 Within an image field (inEos) ............................................................. 121
5.6.9 Deleting images ................................................................................. 121
6
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Operator's manual
5.6.10 Opening the recycle bin ....................................................................
121
5.6.11 "Puzzle" dialog box for top view scan (inEos) ...................................
122
5.6.12 Rotational image (inEos)...................................................................
122
5.6.13 Displaying the height image ..............................................................
122
5.6.14 Closing the image catalog.................................................................
122
3D Preview ...................................................................................................
122
5.7.1 General information...........................................................................
122
5.7.2 Opening the 3D Preview ...................................................................
122
5.7.3 Design of the 3D Preview..................................................................
123
5.7.4 Symbol for reference optical impression ...........................................
124
5.7.5 Numbering of optical impressions .....................................................
124
5.7.6 Passive folder....................................................................................
124
5.7.7 Copying/moving optical impressions .................................................
124
5.7.8 Displaying the date/time in the intensity image .................................
125
5.7.9 Displaying the height image ..............................................................
125
5.7.10 Zoom function in the 3D Preview ......................................................
126
5.7.11 Switching between the view of the rotational scan and the entire
model
126
5.7.12 Deleting images ................................................................................
126
5.7.13 Opening the recycle bin ....................................................................
127
5.7.14 Closing the 3D Preview.....................................................................
127
Model calculation..........................................................................................
127
5.8.1 Manual Correlation............................................................................
127
5.8.2 Occlusal contact points .....................................................................
130
Design .....................................................................................................................
131
6.1
Trimming the preparation .............................................................................
131
6.2
Trimming the antagonist...............................................................................
132
6.3
Entering preparation margins, base lines and gingival lines ........................
134
6.3.1 General information...........................................................................
134
6.3.2 Entering the preparation margin........................................................
135
6.3.3 Base lines for pontics ........................................................................
135
6.3.4 Entering a preparation margin with unclear edges............................
136
6.3.5 Gingival line.......................................................................................
137
Redefining the insertion axis ........................................................................
138
6.4.1 Preparing the right insertion axis.......................................................
138
6.4.2 Redefining the insertion axis .............................................................
139
6.4.3 Correcting the orientation of bridges .................................................
140
5.7
5.8
6
6.4
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
7
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Table of contents
6.5
Operator's manual
Deleting and correcting image regions in image fields.................................. 140
6.5.1 Example 1: Removing a powder spot ................................................ 141
6.5.2 Example 2: Deleting disturbing image regions................................... 141
6.5.3 Correction options when milling models............................................. 142
7
Milling ....................................................................................................................... 144
7.1
Material selection .......................................................................................... 144
7.2
Milling Preview .............................................................................................. 145
7.2.1 Milling unit selection ........................................................................... 145
7.2.2 Block visualization.............................................................................. 146
7.2.2.1
General information........................................................................ 147
7.2.3 Change of sprue location ................................................................... 148
7.2.4 Positioning the restoration in a multicolored block ............................. 148
7.2.5 Sinter support..................................................................................... 149
7.3
Starting the milling process ........................................................................... 150
7.3.1 Milling of zirconia and aluminum oxide .............................................. 152
7.4
Stack milling with inLab (or CEREC 3 milling unit)........................................ 153
7.5
Milling test pieces .......................................................................................... 154
7.6
Milling a flip block .......................................................................................... 154
7.6.1 Prerequisite ........................................................................................ 154
7.6.2 Performing the milling process........................................................... 154
7.7
8
9
8
Fast grinding ................................................................................................. 155
Managing/archiving data .......................................................................................... 156
8.1
Saving regularly ............................................................................................ 156
8.2
Connect database ......................................................................................... 156
8.3
Database import ............................................................................................ 156
8.4
Database export ............................................................................................ 156
8.5
Restoration files ............................................................................................ 157
8.6
Consistency check ........................................................................................ 157
Restoration types and design techniques ................................................................ 158
9.1
General information....................................................................................... 158
9.2
Choosing an appropriate design technique................................................... 158
9.3
Overview of restoration types and design techniques................................... 160
9.4
Biogeneric ..................................................................................................... 163
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Operator's manual
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
9.4.1 Introduction .......................................................................................
163
9.4.2 Design example of MOD inlay with lingual extension for tooth 27 ....
163
9.4.2.1
Creating a new restoration ............................................................
163
9.4.2.2
Acquiring the preparation ..............................................................
164
9.4.2.3
Displaying the 3D representation ..................................................
164
9.4.2.4
Hiding image regions.....................................................................
164
9.4.2.5
Entering the preparation margin ....................................................
165
9.4.2.6
Editing the restoration....................................................................
165
9.4.2.7
Examining the milling preview .......................................................
167
9.4.2.8
Milling ............................................................................................
167
9.4.3 Design example for MOD inlay with antagonist image on tooth 16...
168
9.4.3.1
Creating a new restoration ............................................................
168
9.4.3.2
Acquiring an optical impression of the antagonist and the
preparation
168
9.4.3.3
Displaying the 3D representation ..................................................
168
9.4.3.4
Hiding image regions.....................................................................
169
9.4.3.5
Trimming the antagonist ................................................................
169
9.4.3.6
Entering the preparation margin ....................................................
170
9.4.3.7
Making a proximal contact.............................................................
171
9.4.3.8
Examining the milling preview .......................................................
171
9.4.3.9
Milling ............................................................................................
172
9.4.4 Design example of partial crown with antagonist image for tooth 17
172
9.4.4.1
Creating a new restoration ............................................................
172
9.4.4.2
Acquiring an optical impression of the antagonist and the
preparation
172
9.4.4.3
Displaying the 3D representation ..................................................
173
9.4.4.4
Hiding image regions.....................................................................
173
9.4.4.5
Trimming the antagonist ................................................................
174
9.4.4.6
Entering the preparation margin ....................................................
174
9.4.4.7
Examining the milling preview .......................................................
176
9.4.4.8
Milling ............................................................................................
176
9.4.5 Design example of crown with antagonist image for tooth 47 ...........
177
9.4.5.1
Creating a new restoration ............................................................
177
9.4.5.2
Acquiring an optical impression of the antagonist and the
preparation
177
9.4.5.3
Displaying the 3D representation ..................................................
177
9.4.5.4
Hiding image regions.....................................................................
178
9.4.5.5
Trimming the antagonist ................................................................
178
9.4.5.6
Entering the preparation margin ....................................................
178
05.2011
9
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Table of contents
Operator's manual
9.4.5.7
Performing the design .................................................................... 179
9.4.5.8
Examining the milling preview ........................................................ 180
9.4.5.9
Milling ............................................................................................. 180
9.4.6 Articulation design example ............................................................... 181
9.4.6.1
Creating a new restoration ............................................................. 181
9.4.6.2
Acquiring the preparation ............................................................... 181
9.4.6.3
Acquiring the antagonist................................................................. 181
9.4.6.4
Acquiring the dynamic occlusion impression.................................. 181
9.4.6.5
Hiding image regions...................................................................... 181
9.4.6.6
Trimming the antagonist................................................................. 181
9.4.6.7
Entering the preparation margin..................................................... 182
9.4.6.8
Performing the design .................................................................... 182
9.4.6.9
Examining the milling preview ........................................................ 182
9.4.6.10 Milling ............................................................................................. 182
9.4.7 Veneer design example for tooth 21 .................................................. 183
9.4.7.1
Creating a new restoration ............................................................. 183
9.4.7.2
Acquiring the preparation ............................................................... 183
9.4.7.3
Trimming the model and drawing the preparation margin.............. 183
9.4.7.4
Performing the design .................................................................... 184
9.4.7.5
Examining the milling preview ........................................................ 184
9.4.7.6
Milling ............................................................................................. 185
9.4.8 Bridge Biogeneric design technique................................................... 185
9.5
FrameWork ................................................................................................... 186
9.5.1 Designing a crown framework............................................................ 186
9.5.1.1
Creating a new restoration ............................................................. 186
9.5.1.2
Acquiring the preparation ............................................................... 186
9.5.1.3
Hiding image regions...................................................................... 187
9.5.1.4
Examining the milling preview ........................................................ 188
9.5.1.5
Milling a framework ........................................................................ 188
9.5.2 Designing abridge framework ............................................................ 188
9.5.2.1
Orientation of bridges on the model holder .................................... 188
9.5.2.2
Design example: ............................................................................ 189
4-element bridge framework 43-46
9.6
Biogeneric reference ..................................................................................... 192
9.7
Correlation..................................................................................................... 193
9.7.1 General information............................................................................ 193
9.7.2 Manual Correlation............................................................................. 194
10
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Operator's manual
9.8
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
9.7.3 Design example for tooth 16 with extensive fissure caries and
proximal caries on both sides
195
9.7.3.1
Creating a new restoration ............................................................
195
9.7.3.2
Taking an occlusal impression ......................................................
195
9.7.3.3
Acquiring the preparation ..............................................................
196
9.7.3.4
Hiding image regions.....................................................................
197
9.7.3.5
Entering the preparation margin ....................................................
197
9.7.3.6
Adapting the copying line ..............................................................
198
9.7.3.7
Editing the restoration....................................................................
198
9.7.3.8
Examining the milling preview .......................................................
199
9.7.3.9
Milling ............................................................................................
200
9.7.4 Design example of crown for tooth 26...............................................
200
9.7.4.1
Creating a new restoration ............................................................
200
9.7.4.2
Taking an occlusal impression ......................................................
200
9.7.4.3
Acquiring the preparation ..............................................................
201
9.7.4.4
Hiding image regions.....................................................................
202
9.7.4.5
Entering the preparation margin ....................................................
202
9.7.4.6
Accepting a copying line................................................................
203
9.7.4.7
Editing the restoration....................................................................
203
9.7.4.8
Examining the milling preview .......................................................
204
9.7.4.9
Milling ............................................................................................
205
9.7.5 Design example for bridge ................................................................
205
9.7.5.1
Creating a new restoration ............................................................
205
9.7.5.2
Taking an occlusal impression ......................................................
205
9.7.5.3
Acquiring the preparation ..............................................................
206
9.7.5.4
Select the material and set the parameters...................................
206
9.7.5.5
Trimming the model.......................................................................
206
9.7.5.6
Entering the preparation margin and base line..............................
207
9.7.5.7
Drawing a copying line ..................................................................
207
9.7.5.8
Editing the restoration....................................................................
207
9.7.5.9
Examining the milling preview .......................................................
208
9.7.5.10 Milling ............................................................................................
208
WaxUp..........................................................................................................
209
9.8.1 Preparations and creating the wax model .........................................
209
9.8.2 Scanning the object...........................................................................
209
9.8.3 Drawing the bottom line ....................................................................
210
9.8.4 Defining the insertion axis on the screen ..........................................
211
9.8.5 Editing and checking the restoration .................................................
211
9.8.6 Milling the restoration ........................................................................
211
05.2011
11
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Table of contents
9.9
Operator's manual
Implant .......................................................................................................... 211
9.9.1 Introduction ........................................................................................ 211
9.9.1.1
About the software ......................................................................... 211
9.9.1.2
Indications ...................................................................................... 212
9.9.1.3
Explanation of the color markings .................................................. 212
9.9.1.4
Accessories .................................................................................... 213
9.9.2 Mesostructure design technique ........................................................ 215
9.9.2.1
Creating a new restoration ............................................................. 215
9.9.2.2
Scanning the antagonist and the preparation (implant situation) ... 215
9.9.2.3
Setting parameters ......................................................................... 215
9.9.2.4
Displaying the 3D representation ................................................... 215
9.9.2.5
Entering the gingival line ................................................................ 216
9.9.2.6
Setting the insertion axis ................................................................ 216
9.9.2.7
Performing the design .................................................................... 217
9.9.2.8
Examining the milling preview ........................................................ 217
9.9.2.9
Positioning the mesostructure optimally in the dental arch ............ 218
9.9.2.10 Milling a ceramic mesostructure..................................................... 219
9.9.2.11 Finishing an abutment .................................................................... 219
9.9.3 Biogeneric design technique (with scanning of the implant mask)..... 219
9.9.3.1
Create a new restoration ................................................................ 219
9.9.3.2
Acquiring optical impressions......................................................... 219
9.9.3.3
Setting parameters ......................................................................... 220
9.9.3.4
Trimming the preparation ............................................................... 221
9.9.3.5
Trimming the antagonist................................................................. 221
9.9.3.6
Entering the gingival line ................................................................ 221
9.9.3.7
Setting the insertion axis ................................................................ 222
9.9.3.8
Designing a restoration .................................................................. 222
9.9.3.9
Reducing a restoration ................................................................... 223
9.9.3.10 Examining the milling preview ........................................................ 223
9.9.3.11 Milling a ceramic mesostructure..................................................... 224
9.9.3.12 Finishing an abutment .................................................................... 224
9.9.3.13 Milling an abutment crown.............................................................. 224
9.9.4 Biogeneric design technique (without scanning of the implant mask) 225
12
9.9.4.1
Create a new restoration ................................................................ 225
9.9.4.2
Acquiring optical impressions......................................................... 225
9.9.4.3
Setting parameters ......................................................................... 225
9.9.4.4
Trimming the preparation ............................................................... 225
9.9.4.5
Trimming the antagonist................................................................. 226
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Operator's manual
9.10
9.9.4.6
Setting a marking point..................................................................
226
9.9.4.7
Setting the insertion axis ...............................................................
227
9.9.4.8
Designing a restoration..................................................................
227
9.9.4.9
Reducing a restoration ..................................................................
228
9.9.4.10 Examining the milling preview .......................................................
228
9.9.4.11 Milling a ceramic mesostructure ....................................................
229
9.9.4.12 Finishing an abutment ...................................................................
229
9.9.4.13 Milling an abutment crown.............................................................
229
Reduced .......................................................................................................
229
9.10.1 Reduced crown design technique .....................................................
229
9.10.1.1 Full reduction .................................................................................
230
9.10.1.2 Partial reduction.............................................................................
230
9.10.1.3 Milling preview ...............................................................................
230
9.10.1.4 Example for front tooth crown with cutback using partial reduction 231
9.10.2 Reduced bridge design technique.....................................................
232
9.11
Multilayer ......................................................................................................
234
9.12
Quadrant restoration ....................................................................................
235
9.12.1 Acquiring tooth 16 .............................................................................
235
9.12.2 Tooth 16: Creating the restoration ....................................................
235
9.12.3 Tooth 15: Creating the restoration ....................................................
236
9.12.4 Tooth 14: Creating the restoration ....................................................
237
9.12.5 Tooth 17: Creating the restoration ....................................................
237
Milling models...............................................................................................
237
9.13.1 Introduction .......................................................................................
238
9.13.2 Correcting an optical impression .......................................................
238
9.13.3 Drawing or editing the preparation margin ........................................
240
9.13.4 Aligning models.................................................................................
240
9.13.5 Segmenting the model ......................................................................
241
9.13.6 Exposing the preparation margin ......................................................
242
9.13.7 Positioning models ............................................................................
243
9.13.8 Saving and exporting a model...........................................................
243
Abutments with Straumann CARES ........................................................................
244
10.1
How to use the scanbody .............................................................................
244
10.1.1 Scanbody ..........................................................................................
244
10.1.2 Explanation of the symbols ...............................................................
244
10.1.3 Preparing a model for inEos..............................................................
244
10.1.4 Preparing a model for the scanner (inLab)........................................
245
9.13
10
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
13
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Table of contents
10.2
Operator's manual
General information....................................................................................... 245
10.2.1 Cooperation with the Straumann Company ....................................... 245
10.2.2 Indications .......................................................................................... 245
10.2.3 Further information............................................................................. 245
10.3
Mesostructure design technique ................................................................... 246
10.3.1 Creating a new restoration ................................................................. 246
10.3.2 Scanning the antagonist and the preparation (implant situation) ....... 246
10.3.3 Select the material and set the parameters ....................................... 246
10.3.4 Displaying the 3D representation ....................................................... 247
10.3.5 Entering the gingival line .................................................................... 247
10.3.6 Performing the design ........................................................................ 248
10.3.7 Viewing the milling simulation ............................................................ 249
10.3.8 Positioning the abutment optimally in the dental arch........................ 250
10.3.9 Sending an abutment ......................................................................... 251
11
Messages ................................................................................................................. 252
11.1
Information .................................................................................................... 252
11.2
Warnings ....................................................................................................... 252
11.3
Error messages ............................................................................................. 252
11.3.1 Self-explanatory error messages ....................................................... 253
11.3.2 Two-stage errors ................................................................................ 253
11.3.3 Errors in connection with determining or managing construction lines 253
11.3.4 Errors in the reconstruction of the restoration .................................... 254
11.3.5 System errors..................................................................................... 254
11.3.6 Memory allocation errors.................................................................... 255
12
Link to Practice Administration ................................................................................. 256
12.1
Parameter interface....................................................................................... 256
12.1.1 Patient data as parameter list ............................................................ 256
12.1.2 Parameter interface: CerPI.exe.......................................................... 256
12.1.3 Generating or preselecting patients ................................................... 256
12.2
13
SLIDA interface ............................................................................................. 257
Tips and Tricks ......................................................................................................... 258
13.1
Screenshot/TIF image ................................................................................... 258
13.2
Technical notes ............................................................................................. 258
13.2.1 Softguard dongle................................................................................ 258
13.2.2 Problems during communication with the milling unit ........................ 258
14
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Operator's manual
14
15
13.2.2.1 Examples with CEREC 3 acquisition unit connected ....................
258
13.2.2.2 For PC/notebook ...........................................................................
259
13.2.3 No sleep mode during the milling process ........................................
260
13.2.4 Changing the font size ......................................................................
260
13.2.5 Screen saver .....................................................................................
260
13.2.6 Task Manager ...................................................................................
260
13.2.7 Correlation quality .............................................................................
260
13.3
Service program ...........................................................................................
260
13.4
Frequently Asked Questions ........................................................................
261
13.4.1 Database connection ........................................................................
261
13.4.2 Minimizing the program .....................................................................
261
infiniDent Upload tool ..............................................................................................
262
14.1
Function of Upload tool ................................................................................
262
14.2
Installing the Upload tool ..............................................................................
262
14.3
Description of the user interface...................................................................
262
14.3.1 Menu bar ...........................................................................................
263
14.3.2 Tool bar .............................................................................................
263
14.3.3 Overview window ..............................................................................
264
14.4
Preparing files for uploading.........................................................................
264
14.5
Confirming the shopping cart .......................................................................
265
CEREC Connect......................................................................................................
266
15.1
Introduction...................................................................................................
266
15.2
E-mail notification of new orders ..................................................................
266
15.3
Starting the inLab 3D program .....................................................................
266
15.4
Registration ..................................................................................................
266
15.4.1 Registering via the website ...............................................................
266
15.4.2 Registration via the inLab 3D program..............................................
267
15.5
Connecting to the CEREC Connect portal ...................................................
267
15.6
CEREC Connect portal ................................................................................
267
15.6.1 Introduction .......................................................................................
267
15.6.2 "Order list" tab ...................................................................................
268
15.6.3 "Restoration data" tab .......................................................................
268
15.6.4 "Laboratory" tab ................................................................................
269
15.6.5 "More information" tab.......................................................................
269
15.6.6 "Accept/reject" tab .............................................................................
269
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
15
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Table of contents
Operator's manual
15.6.7 infiniDent shopping basket ................................................................. 271
15.7
Reviewing and designing a restoration in the inLab 3D software ................. 271
15.7.1 Assessing the order ........................................................................... 271
15.7.2 Preparation margin............................................................................. 272
15.7.3 Ordering models with a drawn in or modified preparation margin...... 273
15.7.4 Designing a restoration ...................................................................... 273
15.8
Preparation margin for infiniDent models ...................................................... 273
15.9
Administration ............................................................................................... 274
15.10 Quadrant cases from CEREC Connect with inLab 3D .................................. 274
15.10.1Introduction ....................................................................................... 274
15.10.2First restoration. Inlay........................................................................ 275
15.10.3Second restoration. Posterior tooth crown ........................................ 276
15.10.4Third restoration: Anterior tooth crown.............................................. 277
Glossary ................................................................................................................... 278
Index......................................................................................................................... 280
16
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Introduction
Operator's manual
1
Introduction
1.1 Dear Customer,
General description
Thank you for purchasing your inLab 3D software from Sirona.
In connection with inLab / inEos Blue / inLab MC XL, this software enables you to produce dental restorations, e.g. from ceramic material with a
natural appearance (CEramic REConstruction).
Improper use and handling can create hazards and cause damage.
Therefore, please read and carefully follow this manual and the relevant
operating instructions. always keep them within easy reach.
In order to master the system safely, you should train on the exercise model using the described examples.
To prevent personal injury or material damage it is important to observe
all safety information.
To safeguard your warranty claims, please complete the attached Installation Report / Warranty Passport when the system is handed over and
send it to the indicated fax number.
Your Team
Your
inLab 3D Team
1.2 Copyright and trademark
© Sirona Dental Systems GmbH 2010. All rights reserved.
Copyright
The information contained in this manual may be changed without notice.
The software and all related documentation are protected by copyright.
You must therefore handle it in the same way as any other protected material.
Anyone who copies this software or this manual to magnetic tape, floppy
disk or any other medium for any purpose other than his own personal
use without the written permission of Sirona Dental Systems will be liable
to prosecution.
Trademarks
Microsoft® and Windows 7® are registered trademarks.
WindowsTM is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Windows VistaTM is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
Components of other manufacturers
This software contains components produced by the following manufacturers:
Zlib:
© 1995-2002 Jean-loup Gailly, Mark Adler and Greg Roelofs
PaintLib:
© 1996-2000 Ulrich von Zadow
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
17
Introduction
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
General information
Operator's manual
LibTiff:
© 1988-1997 Sam Leffler
© 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
LeadTools:
© 1991-2000 LEAD Technologies, Inc.
1.3 General information
CAUTION
Be sure to observe all warnings!
Please observe the warning and safety information provided to prevent
personal injury and material damage. Any such information is highlighted by a signal word, i.e. DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION or NOTICE.
Please read this document completely and follow the instructions exactly.
You should always keep it within reach.
Original language of the present document: German.
1.3.1
Structure of the document
1.3.1.1
Identification of danger levels
To prevent personal injury and material damage, please observe the warning and safety information provided in this document. Such information
is highlighted as follows:
DANGER
An imminent danger that could result in serious bodily injury or death.
WARNING
A possibly dangerous situation that could result in serious bodily injury
or death.
CAUTION
A possibly dangerous situation that could result in slight bodily injury.
NOTICE
A possibly harmful situation which could lead to damage of the product
or an object in its environment.
IMPORTANT
Application instructions and other important information.
Tip: Information on making work easier.
18
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Introduction
Operator's manual
1.3.1.2
Formats and symbols used
The symbols and character formats used in the present manual have the
following meaning:
✔ Prerequisite
Requests you to do something.
1. First action step
CAUTION! Warning on action
step
2. Second action step
or
➢
Alternative action
ª Result
1.3.1.3
See "Formats and symbols used
[ ➙ 19]“
Identifies a reference to another
text passage and specifies its page
number.
● List
Identifies a list.
"Command/menu item"
Identifies commands, menu items
or quotations.
Conventions
Example
Meaning
Clicking
Pressing once and releasing the left mouse button
or the left trackball button on the acquisition unit (or
foot switch).
Double-clicking
Pressing twice quickly in succession and releasing
the left mouse button or the left trackball button on
the acquisition unit (or foot switch).
Moving the mouse On the acquisition unit: Moving the trackball in the
in one direction
corresponding direction.
1.3.1.4
Seizing a point
Pressing the left mouse button (left trackball button
on the acquisition unit) and keeping it pressed.
For impressions
acquired with 3D
camera: Actuate
foot switch
The same function as: Pressing the left trackball
button on the acquisition unit or the left mouse button.
"Ctrl+N"
On the keyboard: Press the Ctrl and N keys simultaneously.
Formats of the manual
HTML
The Operator's Manual is available on the supplied program DVD in html
format. This format is screen-oriented and is well suited for finding terms,
e.g. in the index or table of contents.
You can call up this manual via the online help function.
PDF
The Operator's Manual is available on the supplied program DVD in pdf
format.
This format is page-oriented and is well suited for printing out the desired
pages.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
19
General safety information
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Indications for use
Operator's manual
2
General safety information
empty
Only use original software
Only use original software or software which has been released by Sirona. To produce restorations, manipulated and non-released software
components must not be used.
Software and software components must not be installed using incorrect
data.
Please also ensure that each installed component has been granted approval in its country. Contact your dealer for more information.
empty
Restoration to be checked by trained personnel
Each restoration which is performed with this software must be checked
for suitability by a trained person (e.g. dental technician or dentist).
2.1 Indications for use
Indications for use
The Sirona Dental CAD/CAM System is intended for use in partially or fully edentulous mandibles and maxillae in support of single or multiple-unit
cement retained restorations. The system consists of three major parts:
TiBase, inCoris mesostructure, and CAD/CAM software. Specifically, the
inCoris mesostructure and TiBase components make up a two-piece abutment which is used in conjunction with endosseous dental implants to
restore the function and aesthetics in the oral cavity. The inCoris mesostructure may also be used in conjunction with the Camlog Titanium
base CAD/CAM (types K2244.xxxx) (K083496) in the Camlog Implant System. The CAD/CAM software is intended to design and fabricate the inCoris mesostructure. The inCoris mesostructure and TiBase two-piece
abutment is compatible with the following implants systems:
● Nobel Biocare Replace (K020646)
● Nobel Biocare Branemark (K022562)
● Friadent Xive (K013867)
● Biomet 3i Osseotite (K980549)
● Astra Tech Osseospeed (K091239)
● Zimmer Tapered Screw-Vent (K061410)
● Straumann SynOcta (K061176)
empty
For the USA only
For the USA only
CAUTION: According to US Federal Law, this product may be sold only
to or by instruction of physicians, dentists, or licensed professionals.
20
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
General safety information
Operator's manual
2.2 Further use of Sirona Dental CAD/CAM System
The Sirona Dental CAD/CAM System is also an optical impression system for computer assisted design and manufacturing (CAD/CAM) according to 21 CFR 872.3661.The system records the topographical
characteristics of teeth, dental impressions, or stone models for use in the
computer-assisted design and manufacturing of dental restorative prosthetic devices. Such devices are exempt from the premarket notification
procedures.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
21
Software
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
CEREC Biogeneric
Operator's manual
3
Software
3.1 CEREC Biogeneric
CEREC Biogeneric is the first method which is able to reconstruct lifelike
occlusal surfaces. On the basis of the features of a patient's single intact
tooth, the program extrapolates the naturally created morphology of other
teeth. The biogeneric occlusal design functions for all single tooth restorations and fully anatomic bridges.
Currently, all occlusal design approaches are based on dental libraries
and databases containing data records of various standard teeth. Conventional CAD/CAM programs retrieve a matching tooth from the archive,
and then generate a design proposal for the given clinical situation. The
user then manually edits and adapts this proposal. The biogeneric occlusal design is to replace the “dental database” design procedure applied in
previous CEREC software versions. It will now be possible to create
crowns, inlays, onlays, veneers, and anatomically sized bridges in a fully
automated manner. The reconstruction can be based on any intact patient tooth from the same type, i.e. posterior tooth or anterior tooth. The often time-consuming process of manually adjusting the tooth to the clinical
situation is now virtually a thing of the past. Moreover, due to the standardized and largely automated routines, the new software is easy to get to
grips with and use.
3.2 System requirements
Working without the acquisition unit
The operation of this software requires an inLab System PC / inEos Blue
PC. The hardware version must be PC Hardware H or higher.
Working with the acquisition unit
If you work with the acquisition unit, it must have the hardware status PC
Hardware HA or higher.
3.3 Installing the software
Administrator rights
NOTICE
Installation only with administrator rights
You must have administrator rights on the PC on which you want to install the software!
Installing the software
Installation procedure
✔ The PC is powered up and all programs are terminated.
1. Insert the DVD in the CD/DVD drive.
ª The setup program starts automatically.
2. If this is not the case, run the "Setup.exe" file in the root directory of
the DVD.
3. Select the language of the installation and click the button marked
"OK".
ª The installation wizard opens.
4. Click the "Next" button.
22
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Software
Operator's manual
ª The license agreement is shown.
5. Accept the license agreement with the "Yes" button.
ª The program continues the installation routine.
Standard installation
1. Click the button marked "Standard Installation".
Selecting the standard installation
NOTICE
Installing DirectX
If DirectX is not yet installed on your computer, it will be installed now.
Accept the license agreement and decide whether the computer is to be
restarted now or later.
2. To complete the installation, you can register to receive current information on software updates and/or have the "ReadMe"file displayed.
This file contains the latest information on the software.
Select or deselect the corresponding checkbox.
3. Click the button marked "Finish".
4. Decide whether the computer should be restarted now or later and
click the button marked "Finish".
Notes on the software version
Information about this software version
You can load a restoration made with an earlier software version with this
version as well. However, once this restoration has been saved with the
current software version, it can no longer be loaded with the earlier software version. The restoration can be saved according to the following
procedures:
● By selecting "Restoration" / "Save" .
● By selecting "Restoration" / "Save as…" .
● Automatically, by confirming the image catalog with the "Next"icon.
● Automatically, by pressing the "Mill"icon.
● Automatically, during virtual seating ("Design" / "Quadrant…".)
3.4 Downloading the software to the milling unit
CAUTION
Transferring the milling program
Following installation of the new software, the new milling program must
be transferred to the milling unit.
empty
inLab
inLab
✔ The new software is installed on the PC.
➢ Transfer the new milling program to the milling unit as described in
the operating instructions for the milling unit.
empty
CEREC/inLab MC XL
inLab MC XL
The new milling program is automatically transferred to the milling unit.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
23
Software
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Uninstalling the software
Operator's manual
3.5 Uninstalling the software
✔ The program is closed.
1. Click "Start"/"Programs"/"inLab"/"Deinstallation" to uninstall the software.
ª During the uninstall procedure, you will be asked whether you
want to delete the patient data or the entries in the registration database (e.g. the calibration data).
2. Depending on your decision, click either "Yes" or "No".
ª The software is uninstalled.
3.6 Copy protection (softguard dongle)
3.6.1
Introduction
Whether a given restoration may be milled depends on the softguard dongleconnected and the identifier of the milling unit used.
3.6.2
Softguard dongle
Information about the CEREC 3D Softguard dongle
NOTICE
The CEREC 3D Softguard dongle is not supported by inLab 3D software.
Heading
Softguard dongle
The following softguard dongles are available:
AK x inLab
● AK x1 .
AK Unlimited inLab 3D
● AK Unlimited inLab 3D
Explanation of AK
AK = Activation Key
Debiting from AK x
The AK x softguard dongles have a counter that deducts one unit for each
milling operation:
Overview of debiting
Restoration
Debit from AK x
Inlay, onlay,
occlusal inlay
1 unit per restoration
Crown
1 unit per restoration
Veneer
1 unit per restoration
Crown framework
1 unit per restoration
Wax-up, Bridge correlation
1 unit per milling operation
Bridge framework, anatomical bridge
1 unit per bridge element
Abutment
1 unit per restoration
1 unit per bridge abutment
1. x = Remaining number of units (that can be milled with this activation key)
24
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Software
Operator's manual
Debiting from AK Unlimited
The AK Unlimited inLab 3D softguard dongles allow unlimited milling of
restorations with the inLab 3D software.
3.6.3
Connecting the softguard dongle
empty
AKx
✔ The PC must have a parallel port.
1. Connect the softguard dongle to the parallel port of the PC.
2. You may then connect further softguard dongles or e.g. a printer to
this softguard dongle.
empty
AK Unlimited inLab 3D or AKx USB softguard dongles
✔ The PC must have a free USB port.
➢ Connect the AK Unlimited inLab 3D or AKx USB softguard dongle to
the USB port of the PC.
3.6.4
Without softguard dongles
All restorations can be scanned, designed and saved without a softguard
dongle. You need a softguard dongle for milling.
3.7 Starting the software
✔ The inLab 3D software is installed. The inLab 3D button is located on
Starting the software
the desktop.
➢ Start the inLab 3D software by double-clicking the inLab 3D button.
or
➢ Click "Start"/"Programs"/"inLab"/"inLab 3D".
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
25
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Description of the user interface
Operator's manual
4
User interface
4.1 Description of the user interface
A
B
C
D
I
E
F
H
G
Main menu
inLab 3D features a menu-controlled user interface enabling you to scan
preparations and then design and mill the required restorations.
Screen displays guide you through the design process and give you a
continuous overview of which program step is currently being performed.
The main menu consists of:
● A: Tool bar
● B: Menu bar
● C: Program window title,
● D: View window
● E: Coordinate system
● F: Design window
● G: Status bar
● H: Scale (1 mm)
● I: Design window (3D viewer)
26
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
You can show or hide the following windows/bars:
● "View"
● "Design"
● "Tool bar"
● "Status bar"
4.2 Tool bar
Explanation on tool bar
You can show or hide the tool bar via the "Window" / "Tool bar" menu
item.
Unavailable functions are grayed out (e.g. Occlusion in the example below).
empty
Description of the buttons
Open new restoration
● Create a new restoration
Load restoration
● Load restoration
Save restoration
● Save restoration
Preparation: camera, scanner, inEos
● Scan/acquire prepared tooth (preparation)
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
27
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Tool bar
Operator's manual
Occlusion: camera, scanner, inEos
● Scan/acquire unprepared tooth (occlusion)
Buccal image
● Acquire a buccal optical impression
Articulation
● Scan/acquire dynamic occlusion impression (articulation)
Antagonist graphics: camera, scanner, inEos
● Scan/acquire antagonist/registration
Next
● One design step forward (Next)
Undo
● One design step backward (Undo)
Start the milling process
● Starting the milling process
infiniDent
● Send restoration to infiniDent
Fragment CEREC Connect button (USA, EU)
● Create a connection to the CEREC Connect portal.
28
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
Toolbar handling
You can drag the tool bar with the mouse and drop it anywhere on the
screen. It can be docked at the left, right, top or bottom edge of the
screen, as is usual with Windows programs. Via "Window" / "Reset"
("Ctrl+R") it can be restored to the position it had on delivery (left edge of
screen).
4.3 View window
4.3.1
Introduction
Description
You can display or hide this window via the menu item "Window"/"View" .
Inactive windows appear dimmed.
You can drag the window with the mouse by grabbing its title bar and drop
it at any position on the screen. Via "Window" / "Reset" ("Ctrl+R") it can
be restored to the position it had on delivery (right edge of screen).
● A: Standard views
View window
● B: Zoom tool
● C: Showing/hiding the neighboring teeth (Trim)
● D: Showing/hiding the contact to the neighboring tooth (Contact)
● E: Cut tool
● F: Showing/hiding the occlusion/articulation/gingival mask
● G: Show/hide antagonist
4.3.2
Standard views
The objects in the Design window can be displayed in six predefined
views by clicking the corresponding arrows:
● "Mesial"
● "Distal"
● "Buccal" / "Labial"
● "Lingual"
● "Cervical"
● "Occlusal" / "Incisal"
When you point to one of these arrows with the mouse cursor, the direction of the view is indicated.
Click on the arrow to turn the object into this view.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
29
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
View window
Operator's manual
There are two ways to display the "Mesial", "Distal", "Buccal"/"Labial" and
"Lingual" views:
Single-click
Double-clicking
Oblique top view
90° view
If you have changed the display of the objects with the zoom tool, you can
reset this change by clicking on the tooth in the View window.
4.3.3
Zoom tool
The objects displayed in the Design window can be zoomed in and out as
follows:
● step by step, by repeatedly clicking the "+" sign (zoom in) or the "-"
sign (zoom out)
● continuously, by pressing and holding down the "+" sign (zoom in) or
the "-" sign (zoom out)
● by pressing the center mouse button and moving the mouse:
–
forward, you zoom the 3D view in
–
back, you zoom the 3D view out
● by simultaneously pressing the left mouse button and the Shift key
and moving the mouse:
4.3.4
–
forward, you zoom the 3D view in
–
back, you zoom the 3D view out
Showing/hiding the neighboring teeth
You can hide the neighboring teeth by clicking the "Trim" button.
For the case that parts of the neighboring teeth are disturbing during input
of the preparation margin, trimming off the disturbing parts is possible.
For this purpose, you can hide parts of the image after image acquisition
(see "Trimming the preparation [ ➙ 131]“).
You can redisplay the neighboring teeth by clicking the "Trim" button
again.
NOTICE
Showing and hiding with the Trim button
If the preparation was not trimmed, you can use the "Trim" button to
show and hide the entire preparation, e.g. for editing the proximal surface of the restoration.
30
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
4.3.5
Showing/hiding the contact to the neighboring tooth (Contact)
You can show or hide the contact surface to the neighboring tooth by clikking the "Contact" button.
You can click on the "Contact" button to open the "Contact Options" dialog box.1 .
You can have the appropriate proximal contact defined automatically by
clicking the corresponding button.
NOTICE
Hiding the neighboring teeth
For better assessment of the contact surface you can hide the neighboring teeth with the "Trim" button.
If you click the "Contact" button, a color scheme with the following
meaning appears on the contact surfaces:
● blue: Clearance 0-1 mm
Smaller surface – larger clearance
● green: Penetration 0-50 µm
● yellow: Penetration 50-100 µm
● red: Penetration >100µm
You can use the design tools "Scale", "Shape", "Form", and "Drop" to design the contact surfaces according to your wishes.
4.3.6
Cut tool
To open the "Cut" window, choose "Cut" or "Ctrl+C".
You can place a cut plane through the restoration and preparation by clikking the "Cut" tool. The cut plane lies parallel to the screen plane. The cut
plane can be moved parallel in two ways:
● step by step, by repeatedly clicking the “+” or “-” Cut semicircles
● continuously, by keeping a semicircle pressed.
inLab
When using the WaxUp design technique and for bridges, the cut surface
is displayed in the status bar.
1. This option can only be used for posterior tooth crowns (not for anterior tooth
crowns, veneer, etc.).
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
31
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
View window
Operator's manual
Cut plane
To exit the "Cut" tool, click the highlighted "Cut" bar.
Close the "Cut" window by clicking x (Close) or the "Cut" button.
4.3.7
empty
Showing/hiding the occlusion/articulation/gingival mask
Occlusion
Occlusion
If an image field of the occlusion exists, you can show or hide it with the
help of this button.
empty
Gingival mask
Gingival mask
If an image is available in the "Gingivamask" image field, you can use this
button to show/hide the gingival mask.
empty
Articulation
Articulation
This function can be used only for the following:
● "Restoration": "Crown"
● "Design technique": "Articulation"
If a dynamic occlusion impression (FGP, Functionally Generated Path)
exists, it can be shown or hidden with the help of this button.
If you click the "Articulation" button, the 3D model of the dynamic occlusion impression is displayed and an additional dialog box is opened with
the "Fit Restoration" button.
32
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
Interfering_contact_FGP
If you click the "Fit Restoration" button, all of the interfering contacts of the
restoration which "protrude out of" the FGP will be virtually milled so that
they disappear.
Interfering contacts milled
4.3.8
Show/hide antagonist
By clicking the button marked "Antagonist" you can show/hide the Antagonist window.
Antagonist window
In this window, under "View Options" you can activate or deactivate the
following:
● "Interocclusal Clearance"
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
33
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
View window
Operator's manual
● "Antagonist"
● "Antagonist surface"
4.3.8.1
Interocclusal clearance
When "Interocclusal Clearance" is activated, a color scheme with the folDescription
lowing meaning of the colors appears on the restoration:
Differentiation (inlays, crowns and veneers)
empty
for inlays, crowns and veneers
Explanation of colors
● blue: Clearance 0-1 mm
Smaller surface – larger clearance
● green: Penetration 0-50 µm
● yellow: Penetration 50-100 µm
● red: Penetration >100µm
empty
Differentiation (crowns and bridges)
For crown and bridge frameworks with an antagonist image
● red: Distance from the antagonist is less than the set veneering thickness (see "Veneering thickness" [ ➙ 71])
Design tools
You may use the "Scale", "Shape", "Form" or "Drop" design tools to adapt
the distance.
4.3.8.2
Antagonist
If "Antagonist" is activated, the optical impression of the centric bite registration appears above the restoration.
34
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
Antagonist displayed
By clicking the buttons next to "Elevate Antagonist" you can elevate or
lower the registration. You obtain a better view onto the occlusal surface
by elevating the antagonist.
You can view the restoration from all directions and adapt it with the "Design"tools.
4.3.8.3
Antagonist surface
If "Antagonist surface" is activated, the occlusal surface of the antagonist/
registration appears above the restoration.
Antagonist surface displayed
By clicking the buttons next to "Elevate Antagonist" you can elevate or lower the registration. You obtain a better view onto the occlusal surface by
elevating the antagonist.
You can view the restoration from all directions and adapt it with the "Design"tools.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
35
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
View window
Operator's manual
4.3.8.4
Tools subgroup
Antagonist window
With the "Manual Trim" button in the "Antagonist" dialog box you can also
hide image regions at a later point in time.
For posterior tooth crowns with antagonist (design technique "Biogeneric"
or "Biogeneric reference"), the "Settling", "Cusp settling" and "Virtual grinding" buttons all have the same function as in the automatic crown suggestion (see "Options" in the "Settings" Chapter [ ➙ 85]). You can use
these functions if you have changed the suggested crown with the "Design" tools and would like to redefine the occlusal contacts.
For inlays/onlays in the design technique "Biogeneric" with antagonist,
you can automatically set the occlusal contacts with these buttons. Automatic adaptations to the antagonist are performed for the inlay/only initial
suggestion.
empty
Settling button
With this button, the restoration is adapted to the antagonist so that the
resulting contact situation is as stable as possible. The contacts should
have as little penetration volume as possible. The morphology of the occlusal surface is not changed.
empty
Cusp settling button
If the restoration features a cusp tip, the "Cusp settling" button is automatically enabled. This button triggers automatic adaptation of the individual
cusps of the restoration to the antagonist. The cusps are adapted to the
antagonist so that the resulting contact situation is as stable as possible.
The morphology of the occlusal surface is changed.
empty
Virtual grinding button
This button can be used to virtually grind the existing occlusal contacts.
This function removes the red contacts down to a size that you have defined in the parameter dialog under "Occlusal contact strength".
When designing inlays/onlays and crowns which are not automatically
adapted, we recommend that you initially adapt the restoration to the present situation with the "Design" tools. Then you can finalize the contact
situation with the following buttons in this order:
1. "Settling"
2. "Cusp settling"
3. "Virtual grinding"
36
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
NOTICE
Undoing the last adaptation step
For crowns and inlays, you can undo the last adaptation step ("Manual
Trim", "Settling", "Cusp settling", and "Virtual grinding") with the red arrow as long as the corresponding button is still pressed.
4.4 View window in the design technique model
Description
You can display or hide this window via the menu item "Window"/"View" .
Inactive windows appear dimmed.
You can drag the window with the mouse by grabbing its title bar and drop
it at any position on the screen. Via "Window" / "Reset" ("Ctrl+R") it can
be restored to the position it had on delivery (right edge of screen).
The buttons have the following meaning:
● "Lower jaw": show lower jaw
● "Upper jaw": show upper jaw
● "Segmented lower": show lower segmented jaw
● "Segmented upper": show upper segmented jaw
● "Ditched Segments": display ditched segments
4.5 Design window
You can show or hide this window via the "Window"/"Design" menu item.
Unavailable functions appear dimmed, e.g. "Position".
You can drag the window with the mouse by grabbing its title bar and drop
it at any position on the screen.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
37
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Design window
Operator's manual
When you select "Window"/"Reset", the window returns to its default position (right screen margin).
The following "Design" tools are described in this section:
● A: Editing tool (Edit)
● B: Form tool
● C: Wax drop (Drop)
● D: Scaling tool (Scale)
● E: Shaping tool (Shape)
● F: Positioning tool (Position)
● G: Rotation tool (Rotate)
4.5.1
Editing tool (Edit)
Click on the "Edit" tool to activate/deactivate the Editing function.
Description
Editing function
38
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
The editing function can be applied to all the design lines. The design lines are displayed automatically and have different color coding.
empty
inLab table
Colors of design lines
4.5.1.1
Design line
Color
Preparation margin, base line,
gingival line
Blue
Proximal contact line
Pink
Marginal ridge, labiolingual line
turquoise
Fissure, cutting edge or copying
line
Green
Connector line
light blue
Editing a construction line
1. Click the "Edit" button.
2. Double-click a construction line to set the first point of the correction
line.
3. Click to set further points of the correction line.
NOTICE
Deleting clicks
You can also undo the last click by right-clicking.
4. Setting the end point of the correction line:
Closed line (e.g. crown equator)
Double-click the construction line
Open line (e.g. fissure line)
Double click at the desired new end point of the line.
NOTICE
Undoing changes
You can undo the last change made in the line profile by clicking the
"Undo" icon.
NOTICE
Changing the connection to the preparation margin
If you want to change the connection to the preparation margin (red dot),
grab the red dot with the left mouse button and move it along the preparation margin.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
39
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Design window
Operator's manual
4.5.1.2
Changing a pontic
NOTICE
In the "Multilayer" design technique, ensure that you draw in the baseline for the pontic in tooth size.
Changing a pontic
The selected pontic and the neighboring connectors can be hidden by
clicking the "Edit"-tool. The base line is offered for editing.
After the "Edit" tool is closed, only the area underneath the proximal contact line is recalculated.
4.5.1.3
Changing the abutment coping
Changing the abutment coping
The selected abutment coping and the neighboring connectors can be
hidden by clicking the "Edit" tool. The preparation margin is offered for
editing.
40
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
4.5.1.4
Changing connectors
When you click the "Edit"-tool two light blue lines (A) appear at the transitions to the neighboring elements. You can edit either of these lines by
double-clicking them. Double-click the line again to stop editing it.
4.5.1.5
Bridge construction (biogeneric, biogeneric reference, reduced,
multilayer)
For bridge constructions ("Biogeneric", "Biogeneric reference", "Reduced", "Multilayer"), when you click on "Edit", all design lines of the selected bridge element are displayed and can be edited. Any other bridge
elements are hidden for a better perspective.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
41
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Design window
Operator's manual
4.5.2
Form tool (Form)
You can activate/deactivate the "Form" tool by clicking the "Form" button.
Apply
material
Remove
material
Blend
material
You can use this function to
● Applying material
● Removing material
● Blending material
Clicking on the symbol activates the corresponding mode.
NOTICE
Alternative
Using the space bar on the keyboard, you can change functions in the
following order:
Apply > Remove > Blend > Apply ...
4.5.2.1
Changing the size of the layer to be applied
When you start this tool, the diameter of the layer to be applied is 1.35
mm.
Slider
The slider allows you to modify the size of the layer to be applied.
NOTICE
Alternative
You can also modify the layer size (orange-colored area) by right-clikking the restoration:
Increase layer size – push mouse forward while holding down the right
mouse button.
Decrease layer size – drag mouse backward while holding down the
right mouse button.
The next layers will be applied using this size. This size remains active
until you change the size again or deactivate the Form tool.
The ratio between material thickness and radius of the applied layer is
1:70.
42
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
4.5.3
Wax drop (Drop)
You can activate/deactivate the wax drop function by clicking the "Drop"
button.
Apply
material
Remove
material
Blend
material
You can use this function to
● Applying material
● Removing material
● Blending material
Clicking on the symbol activates the corresponding mode.
NOTICE
Alternative
Using the space bar on the keyboard, you can change functions in the
following order:
Apply > Remove > Blend > Apply ...
4.5.3.1
Modifying the wax drop size
When you start this tool, the diameter of the drops is 1.08 mm.
Slider
The slider allows you to modify the size of the drops.
NOTICE
Alternative
If you click on the restoration with the right mouse button, you can modify the size of the wax drops:
Increase size of wax drops – push mouse forward while holding down
the right mouse button.
Decrease size of wax drops – drag mouse backward while holding down
the right mouse button.
The next drops can be applied using this size. This size remains active
until you change the size again or deactivate the "Drop" tool.
The ratio between material thickness and radius of the drops is 1:70.
4.5.3.2
Applying material
Application can be performed in two ways:
● Drop by drop, by clicking the desired point of the restoration
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
43
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Design window
Operator's manual
● Apply a row of drops in material color by holding down the left mouse
button and moving the cursor. The density of the drops is controlled
by the speed with which you move the cursor.
4.5.3.3
Removing material
Removal can be performed in two ways:
● Drop by drop, by clicking the desired point of the restoration
● Remove a row of orange colored drops by holding down the left
mouse button and moving the cursor. The density of the drops is controlled by the speed with which you move the cursor.
4.5.3.4
Blending material
The cursor assumes the shape of a hand and can then be used to blend
or smoothen the surface locally; to do so, press and hold down the left
mouse button.
4.5.4
4.5.4.1
Scaling tool (Scale)
Activating the scaling function
You can activate the scaling function by clicking the "Scale" tool. This
function enables you to scale a selected region.
Description
4.5.4.2
Scaling with inlays, onlays, crowns, veneers and bridge biogenerics/biogeneric reference/reduced/multilayer
Scaling range
First select the region to be scaled by clicking one of the lines.
empty
Selecting the scaling region
Region to be selected
Click ...
Restoration half...
Preparation margin...
lingual/buccal/mesial/distal
lingual/buccal/mesial/distal
Region between the preparation Proximal contact line...
margin and marginal ridge ...
lingual/buccal/mesial/distal
lingual/buccal/mesial/distal
Region above the proximal con- Marginal ridge...
tact line...
lingual/buccal/mesial/distal
lingual/buccal/mesial/distal
44
Occlusal region
Fissure line
Cusp
Turquoise-colored ball on the marginal ridge
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
NOTICE
For crowns and inlays:
When selecting the preparation margin, proximal contact line and marginal ridge, you can extend the selection by the second half of the selected region by pressing the space bar.
If you then press space bar once again, the original region is selected
again.
NOTICE
For bridges
You can double-click to select an element of a bridge.
The entire bridge element is selected. To select only half an element,
press the space bar.
Once you have selected a region, you can modify it as follows:
● step by step, by repeatedly clicking a segment of the circle (e.g. buccal)
● continuously, by keeping a segment of the circle (e.g. buccal)
pressed.
Scaling the selected region
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
45
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Design window
Operator's manual
4.5.4.3
Scaling with crown framework restorations and abutment copings
of the bridge framework
Scaling with crown framework restorations...
You can select the abutment copings of the bridge framework with a
double-click.
You can change the wall thicknesses with the activated Scale tool (even
in reduced elements).
empty
Changing wall thicknesses
Click button …
Wall thickness...
A
increases occlusally
B
decreases occlusally
C
increases circularly
D
decreases circularly
The occlusal and circular wall strengths are displayed in the status bar.
4.5.4.4
Scaling with connectors and pontics
Scaling with connectors and pontics
You can select connectors and pontics with a double-click and scale them
as a whole (even with reduced pontics).
empty
Scaling a pontic
Click button …
Pontic...
A or C
becomes larger
B or D
becomes smaller
empty
Scaling connectors
NOTICE
The connectors can be scaled via the buttons or on the connector itself.
46
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
Click button …
Connector ...
A
increases "buccal<->lingually"
B
increases "occlusal<->cervically"
C
decreases "across the complete diameter"
D
decreases "occlusal<->cervically"
E
decreases "buccal<->lingually"
F
increases "across the complete diameter"
The red circle indicates the position of the minimal cross-section area.
You can change this cross-section area by left-clicking the red circle and
dragging the mouse:
● Mouse forward - minimum cross-section area is enlarged
● Mouse backward - minimum cross-section area is reduced
The connector can also be scaled area-wise via the red balls. If you "drag"
a ball, the area (1/4 circle) around the ball changes.
In order to changes these areas, you can rotate the balls on the circle
(right-click the balls).
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
47
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Design window
Operator's manual
Connectors whose cross-section area is less than the minimum area specified by the material manufacturer are highlighted in red.
Connectors may initially be highlighted in red if the design (pontics which
are too narrow) prevents you from creating connectors with an adequately large cross-section.
4.5.4.5
Exiting the scaling function
To exit the scaling tool, click the highlighted bar "Scale".
Exit
4.5.5
Shaping tool (Shape)
You can smoothen surfaces and apply or remove material with the "Shape" tool.
● along an open line or
● inside a closed area
To exit the "Shape" tool, click the highlighted "Shape" bar.
48
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
4.5.5.1
Applying material along an open line
1. Start to draw a line by double-clicking the restoration.
2. Draw the line along which you want to apply or remove material by
clicking.
NOTICE
Starting point and end point
Individual points may lie on the residual tooth, but the starting and end
point must be on the restoration.
3. Set the line end by double-clicking.
4. You can raise (+) or lower (-) the line:
step by step, by clicking the "+" or "-" "Shape" semicircle
continuously, by pressing and holding the "+" or "-" semicircle.
4.5.5.2
Applying material inside a closed area
1. Start to draw a line by double-clicking the restoration.
2. Draw the area inside which you want to apply or remove material by
clicking.
NOTICE
Starting point and end point
Individual points may lie on the residual tooth, but the starting and end
point must be on the restoration.
3. Set the line end by double-clicking the starting point.
4. The area inside the surface is activated; you can apply (+) or remove
(-) material:
step by step, by clicking the "+" or "-" "Shape" semicircle
continuously, by pressing and holding the "+" or "-" semicircle.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
49
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Design window
Operator's manual
4.5.5.3
Smoothing an area
You can also smoothen a previously defined area with the "Shape" tool.
1. Start to draw a line by double-clicking the restoration.
2. Draw the area inside which you want to smoothen the surface by clikking.
NOTICE
Starting point and end point
Individual points may lie on the residual tooth, but the starting and end
point must be on the restoration.
3. Set the line end by double-clicking the starting point.
4. Activate the smoothing function by pressing the spacebar.
ª The surface inside the area is smoothed.
4.5.6
Reduce tool (Reduce)
Reduce tool
If the "Reduce" design technique is selected in the New dialog box, the
"Reduce" tool will appear instead of the Design tool "Shape". Two new
designations appear in the status line for "Margin" and "Reduction".
Description of the "Reduce" tool:
● Dark blue buttons – change the reduction strength ("Reduced")
● Light blue buttons - change the width of the margin, which remains
unreduced ("Margin")
● Black "R" in the center – starts the reduction
4.5.7
Positioning tool (Position)
You can activate the positioning function by clicking the "Position" tool.
Description
50
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
With this function you can move the entire restoration (or the selected element) in the following directions:
● mesio-distal
● bucco-lingual
● occlusal-cervical
The restoration can be positioned in two ways:
● step by step, by repeatedly clicking a segment of the circle
● continuously, by keeping a circle segment pressed.
Changing bridge components
Positioning a pontic
When you select and move the pontic of a framework, any associated
connectors are moved accordingly. If a connector was previously
changed, its relative position to the pontic remains the same.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
51
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Design window
Operator's manual
Position
The red circle indicates the position of the minimal cross-section area.
You can change this position by left-clicking the red circle and dragging
the mouse left or right.
To exit the positioning tool, click the highlighted "Position" button.
When exiting the positioning tool, the connection with the preparation
margin (base line) is restored.
Exit
4.5.8
Rotation tool (Rotate)
You can activate the rotation function by clicking the "Rotate" tool.
With this function you can rotate the entire restoration (or the selected
element) about the following axes:
● mesio-distal
● bucco-lingual
● occlusal-cervical
52
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
The restoration can be rotated in two ways:
● step by step, by repeatedly clicking a segment of the circle
● continuously, by keeping a circle segment pressed.
To exit the rotation tool, click the highlighted Rotate button.
When you exit the rotation tool, the connection to the preparation margin
(base line) is restored.
4.6 Status bar
Description
Status bar
NOTICE
Showing/hiding the status bar
The status bar can be shown or hidden via the "Window"/"Status bar"
menu item.
The status bar provides current information about:
● A: the steps to be performed,
● B: the current activity of the milling unit,
● C: with restoration and preparation displayed, the ceramic thickness
at the mouse cursor position. The field is colored red if the position of
the mouse cursor exceeds the material thickness.
● D: the minimum fissure height
● E: the height of the preparation / occlusion at the mouse cursor position
Additional information
● the circular wall strength (for crown framework and abutment copings)
● the occlusal wall strength (for crown framework and abutment copings)
● the connector cross section (for bridge framework)
● the cut surface (for WaxUp in the "Cut" window)
● Information for "Margin" and "Reduction" (in the "Reduce" design
technique)
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
53
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Design window
Operator's manual
4.7 Design window
4.7.1
Design window (3D viewer)
inLab 3D contains a main window (3D viewer) for visualizing and designing a restoration in 3D.
The 3D viewer opens after all image fields have been acquired. The time
up to display of the viewer depends upon the number of image fields and
the number of single optical impressions.
You can do the following in the Design window:
● view the image fields of the preparation, of the occlusion and of the
antagonists as well as the restoration, either individually or in any
combination,
● determine a new insertion axis,
● hide an image region by entering an open line mesially and distally,
● enter the preparation margin,
● immediately see the effects caused by applying a tool (e.g. editing,
scaling ...)
● view the restoration in the milling simulation before machining,
● rotate the objects arbitrarily. To do so, press and hold down the left
mouse button and move the mouse in the desired direction.
● For better orientation, the direction is indicated (e.g. mesial, lingual,
etc.).
The objects are displayed centered. You can change the position of the
objects with the right mouse button pressed.
4.7.2
Scale
The scale is displayed in the bottom left corner of the 3D viewer. The distance between A and B corresponds to 1 mm.
If the display of the object is zoomed in or out, then the display of the scale
changes correspondingly.
4.7.3
Coordinate system
The coordinate system shows you how the object is oriented on the
screen. The three arrows point in the following directions:
● red: buccal
● green: mesial
● blue: occlusal
54
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
4.8 Menu bar
Description of menu bar
The menu bar at the top edge of the window allows you to select further
program functions which cannot be accessed via the tool bars.
Master/inLab mode graphics menu bar
The following menus are available:
● "Restoration"
● "Design"
● "Settings"
● "Window"
● "?"
Alternatives to the menu bar
NOTICE
Alternatives to the menu bar
Some menu functions can also be activated by using the shortcut keys
specified in the menu item or the corresponding icons on the tool bar.
4.8.1
Restoration menu
Restoration graphic menu
Restoration menu
New restoration
Via the menu you can...
● open a window for a new restoration
"Restoration"/"New…" or "Ctrl+N"
Loading restoration graphics
Load restoration
● load an existing restoration
"Restoration"/"Load…" or "Ctrl+O"
Delete restoration
● delete a restoration
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
55
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Menu bar
Operator's manual
"Restoration"/"Delete…"
Saving restoration graphics
Saving + exporting restorations
● save a restoration
"Restoration"/"Save"... or "Ctrl+S"
● save a restoration under another name or assign it to another patient
"Restoration"/"Save as…"
● export a restoration
"Restoration"/"Export…"
Importing a restoration
● import a restoration
"Restoration"/"Import..."
Administering patient data
● administer patient data
"Restoration"/"Administer patient data...".
Restoration - Send To + Exit
● send restoration data by e-mail
"Restoration"/"Send to..."
● open a previous restoration or
● quit the application with
"Restoration"/"Exit"
4.8.1.1
Creating a restoration
empty
Selecting an existing patient
1. Select "Restoration"/"New…" or click on the "New" icon.
ª The "Select patient for new restoration" dialog box appears.
Selecting a patient for a new restoration
2. Select a patient and click the "OK" button.
ª The New dialog appears.
empty
Creating a new patient
1. Select "Restoration"/"New…" or click on the "New" icon.
ª The "Select patient for new restoration" dialog box appears.
56
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
Selecting a patient for a new restoration
2. Click the "New" button.
ª A dialog box then appears.
Creating a new patient
3. Enter "Dentist", "Patient", "Scan date"1 and/or a "Reference number".
The suggested scan date is the current date.
NOTICE
Inserting an image
With the "Image" button, you can assign an image (a photo) to each patient.
4. Click the "OK" button.
ª The New dialog appears.
In the data structure, a patient is uniquely identified by one of the following
two entries:
● "Dentist", "Patient", "Scan date"
or
● "Reference number".
If the database connection is used, the "Dentist", "Patient", and "Scan
date" must be specified; specification of the "Reference number" is optional.
1. The scan date must be entered according to the syntax selected in the regional
setting of Windows: in the format DD.MM.YYYY (e.g.: 27.03.1964) or MM/DD/
YYYY (e.g.: 03/27/1964).
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
57
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Menu bar
Operator's manual
4.8.1.2
Loading a restoration
inLab graphics
Load restoration
➢ Select "Restoration"/"Load…".
Instructions
ª The "Load restoration" dialog box opens.
Check box
To display the preview, a check mark must be placed in front of "Show
Preview".
Preview conditions
The preview shows either the preparation impression or the 3D model of
the preparation, provided it has already been reconstructed.
Rotating a 3D preview
NOTICE
Rotating a 3D preview
The 3D preview can be rotated with the mouse and viewed from all sides
(control the same as for rotating the model in the 3D viewer).
4.8.1.3
Deleting a restoration
Deleting a graphic restoration
Deleting a restoration
1. Select "Restoration"/"Delete…".
Instructions
ª The "Delete restoration" dialog box opens.
2. Select the restoration you would like to delete.
3. Click the "Delete" button.
ª You will be asked if the restoration should be deleted.
4. Confirm by clicking the "Yes" button.
ª The restoration will then be deleted.
To display the preview, a check mark must be placed in front of "Show
Preview".
3D model/preparation preview
The preview shows either the preparation impression or the 3D model of
the preparation, provided it has already been reconstructed.
58
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
Note on rotating the 3D preview
NOTICE
Rotating a 3D preview
The 3D preview can be rotated with the mouse and viewed from all sides
(control the same as for rotating the model in the 3D viewer).
4.8.1.4
Exporting a restoration or scan data
Instructions
If a restoration is open, it can be saved in compressed form at any location.
✔ You have opened a restoration.
1. Select "Restoration"/"Export…".
ª A standard Windows file dialog box opens.
2. Select the target folder to which you want to export the restoration.
3. Assign any name to the restoration.
4. Click the "Save" button.
ª The restoration is exported.
inLab file type
The restoration can be saved under any name, but the file type used must
be "*.cdt" or "*.idt" if the restoration is to be milled on an inLab or inLab
MC XL.
Sending data to infiniDent inLab
A special data format, "*.idt", is used to send data to infiniDent. Since this
file format is distinctly smaller, it speeds up file transfer. Depending on the
attached OPEN xy Softguard (e.g. OPEN GALILEOS Implant, format
*.ssi), export to other special formats is also enabled.
STL can only be selected as an output format in inEos Blue. However, the
export refers only to the scan data and not to the restoration data.
4.8.1.5
Importing a restoration or scan data
✔ An existing restoration is located on your acquisition unit.
Importing a restoration
1. Select "Restoration"/"Import...".
ª A standard Windows file dialog box opens in which a file search
of all PC drives (hard disks, floppy disks and CDs) can be performed to find compressed inLab restorations.
2. Select the folder where the restoration is located.
3. Select the restoration file.
NOTICE
File types
If the selected file ("*.cdt", "*.sdt", "*idt." or "*.dat") is a inLab restoration,
it will open. If not, it will not open, and an error message will be displayed. Depending on the attached OPEN xy Softguard (e.g. OPEN
3Shape, format *.3si), importing to other special formats is also enabled.
4. Click the "Open" button
ª A dialog box opens.
5. Assign a name to the restoration.
6. Click the "OK" button.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
59
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Menu bar
Operator's manual
ª The restoration is then imported and opened.
NOTICE
Rotating a 3D preview
The 3D preview can be rotated with the mouse and viewed from all sides
(control the same as for rotating the model in the 3D viewer).
Under the preview window the tooth number, the restoration type and the
design technique of the selected restoration file are shown.
The thumbnail view additionally shows a preview of the preparation impression in the folder list.
4.8.1.6
Managing patient data
Graphics: dentist, patient, scan date, reference number
Managing inLab patient data
➢ Select "Restoration"/"Administer patient data...".
Instructions
ª The "Administer patient data..." dialog box opens.
The "Administer patient data..." dialog box primarily contains a list of all
patients.
Dentist, patient, scan date, reference number
In addition to dentists and patients, the dialog box also shows the scan
date and reference number.
Search
You can sort the entries by clicking the column header.
With the help of the "Search" text box, you can make the list more clear
and concise by entering a last name, first name or initial letter.
Example
If you enter the letter "c" in the "Search" text box, a list of all patients whose last name, first name or card index number contains the letter "c" is displayed.
4.8.1.6.1
Creating a new patient
1. Click the "New" button.
2. Enter the "Dentist", "Patient" and "Scan date"1 and/or a "Reference
number". The suggested scan date is the current date.
1. The scan date must be entered according to the syntax selected in the regional
setting of Windows: in the format DD.MM.YYYY (e.g. 27.03.1964) or MM/DD/
YYYY (e.g.: 03/27/1964).
60
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
NOTICE
Inserting an image
With the "Image" button, you can assign an image (a photo) to each patient.
3. Click the "OK" button.
ª The patient is stored in the patient list.
In the data structure, a patient is uniquely identified by one of the following
two entries:
● "Dentist", "Patient", "Scan date"
or
● "Reference number".
If the database connection is used, the "Dentist", "Patient" and "Scan
date" must be entered; input of the "Reference number" is optional.
4.8.1.6.2
Editing patient data
inLab graphics
Editing inLab patient data
1. Click the "Edit" button.
Instructions
ª A dialog box is displayed.
2. Change "Dentist", "Patient", "Scan date" or "Reference number".
3. Click the "OK" button.
ª The changes are stored in the patient list.
4.8.1.6.3
Deleting patient data
The patient administration also enables you to delete a patient.
NOTICE
Assigned restorations
If any inLab or video images are still assigned to a patient, a warning allowing you to cancel the delete operation will appear.
If you confirm the delete process, these images will also be deleted.
Patients to whom X-ray images are assigned cannot be deleted.
1. Click the "Delete" button.
ª A dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the "OK" button.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
61
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Menu bar
Operator's manual
ª The patient data are deleted from the patient list.
If a new restoration is selected (via the tool bar or the Restoration menu)
a dialog box very similar to the one for patient administration appears
(see "Creating a new restoration" [ ➙ 56]). It is not possible to edit and/or
delete patient data.
4.8.1.7
Sending a restoration
Explanation
If an Internet e-mail connection is configured on your PC, you can send
data via e-mail.
4.8.2
Design menu
A tooth restoration must be designed in an exactly defined sequence.
Using the "Design" menu, you can...
● continue to the next design step
"Design"/"Next" or "Return"
● return to the previous design step
"Design"/"Undo" or "Ctrl+Z"
● change the restoration type, design technique and/or tooth of the
opened restoration
"Design"/"Change"
● instruct the program to perform virtual seating and the opening of a
second program, (for quadrant restoration)
"Design"/"Quadrant…"
62
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
inLab
● open a second program to edit and mill the crown for the mesostructure you have created (only available in design mode "Implant"/"Biogeneric").
"Design"/"Abutment Crown"
● open a second program to edit and mill the veneer structure for the
framework (only available in the "Multilayer" design technique).
"Design"/ "Edit veneering structure…"
● manually execute the adjustment to adjacent teeth and antagonists
using the pre-positioning tool
"Design" / "Pre-positioning"
● redefine the center
"Design"/"Centre..."
● redefine the "Insertion axis...".
● Correct optical impressions...
4.8.2.1
Change
Using the "Change" menu item you can change the restoration type, the
design technique and/or the tooth of the opened restoration.
4.8.2.2
Quadrant
Description: quadrant
NOTICE
Quadrant restoration
During a quadrant restoration, the software will not let you switch to a
tooth from the opposite jaw.
When you switch to a tooth in the opposite quadrant of the same jaw,
the model is automatically rotated by 180° to ensure correct direction
designations.
Via the "Quadrant…" menu item, the virtual seating and opening of a second program is essentially performed automatically.
After this menu item is selected, the New dialog box for selecting the
tooth, the restoration type and the design technique opens. The patient is
accepted. This is followed by the virtual seating and start of a second inLab 3D program.
In the program running in the foreground, the old restoration is in its original state and could be milled, for example.
The program with the virtually seated restoration is loaded in the background. It can be reached e.g. via the task bar or the task selection keys
(Alt+Tab). In this program the dialog for centering ("Centre...") is opened.
NOTICE
Setting the insertion axis
Remember to set the insertion axis correctly after drawing in the preparation margin ("Design"/"Insertion axis...").
inLab link
Also refer to the example under "Quadrant restoration" [ ➙ 235].
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
63
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Menu bar
Operator's manual
4.8.2.3
Abutment crown
1. In order to mill a crown that fits the abutment you just designed, select
the "Design" menu and then the "Abutment Crown" menu item.
Abutment crown procedure
ª A new inLab 3D software milling preview is opened automatically.
NOTICE
Make sure no more changes are made to the crown or the abutment
which could affect the fit.
2. Click the "Mill" button.
3. Start the milling process (see also Operating Instructions of the milling unit).
Abutment crown description
This function is only available if the design technique Implant or Biogenerics was selected.
4.8.2.4
Editing the veneer structure
This function is available only if the "Multilayer" design technique was
selected.
Selecting the menu option "Design" / "Edit veneering structure…" displays the veneer structure of the restoration in a separate milling preview.
To do this, the inLab 3D software opens once more.
NOTICE
Make sure no further changes are made to the framework or the superstructure which could affect the fit.
4.8.2.5
Pre-positioning tool
This tool is available to you directly following automatic calculation of the
initial suggestion of a fully anatomic crown or bridge restoration in the
case of the following design procedure:
Design procedure for inLab
● "Biogeneric",
● "Biogeneric reference",
● "Reduced",
● "Multilayer".
Once this tool has been activated, the automatic adjustments to the adjacent teeth and the antagonists are reverted. You can now manually adjust
the restoration using the tools of the "Design" window.
64
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
4.8.2.6
Center
Using the "Centre..." menu item you can open the "Centre" window. In this
window you can define the preparation you want to further work with as
center. This function is especially helpful in quadrant restoration.
empty
Defining the center
1. Select "Design"/"Centre...".
ª The "Centre" window opens.
2. Click the center of the preparation to be edited.
Defining a new center
3. Click the "Fix" button.
ª The preparation appears in the center of the viewer and the "Centre" window closes.
Defining a new center
If you want to define another preparation as center:
1. Select "Design"/"Centre...".
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
65
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Menu bar
Operator's manual
2. Click the "Reset" button.
3. Click the center of the preparation to be edited.
4. Click the "Fix" button.
ª The preparation appears in the center of the viewer and the "Centre" window closes.
4.8.2.7
Insertion axis
With the help of this function you can redefine the orientation of the preparation (mesial - distal, buccal - lingual) as well as the milling direction
(see "Redefining the insertion axis" [ ➙ 138]) .
4.8.2.8
Correcting an optical impression
With the help of this function, you can remove artifacts and cut away disturbing marginal information, e.g. on optical impressions from the image
fields of the antagonists or of the occlusion (see "Deleting and correcting
image regions in image fields" [ ➙ 140]).
4.8.3
Settings menu
With the "Settings" menu, you can adapt and change the following menu
items:
● "Parameters..."
● "Instruments"
● "Configuration"
● "Calibration"
● "MCXL-Model Mode"
4.8.3.1
Parameters
Explanation: Parameter note
Following reconstruction of the 3D model, a note appears indicating that
the changeable parameters which influence the remaining design steps
will be displayed in the next dialog box. The remaining parameters are inactive. Confirmation of this note automatically opens the Parameters dialog box. The parameter note (like other warning messages) can be
switched off if desired.
66
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
Description
Graphic parameters
A restoration requires some settings with regard to the milling/design process.
You can make the settings for all parameters via the "Settings"/"Parame-
ters..." menu item.
The edited parameter values are saved with the restoration. If a restoration is loaded, the corresponding parameters are automatically loaded
along with it and used.
NOTICE
Factory settings
The unit was set up optimally during final testing at the factory.
You can check the following parameters and modify them, if necessary
inLab menu items
● "Proximal contacts strength"
● "Occlusal contact strength"
● "Occlusal offset"
● "Minimal thickness (occlusal)"
● "Minimal thickness (radial)"
● "Margin thickness"
● "Minimal thickness (Veneer)"
● "Adhesive gap"
● "Spacer"
● "Scan step width"
● "Veneering thickness"
● "WaxUp wall thickness"
● "Gingival spacing (bridge framework)"
Parameters for Multilayer
In the design technique "Multilayer", the following parameters can be
selected:
● "Lingual open angle"
Parameters for Implant
If you selected the restoration "Implant", the following parameters can be
selected:
● "Gingival depth"
● "Design for Abutment Crown"
● "Telescope angle"
● "Shoulder size"
● "Placement pressure"
4.8.3.1.1
Proximal contacts strength
The inLab 3D software automatically determines the proximal contact
thickness.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
67
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Menu bar
Operator's manual
NOTICE
No contact to the neighboring tooth
If the neighboring tooth is located at a distance of more than 1mm (e.g.
neighboring tooth prepared), no contact is made.
The setting of the parameter "Proximal contacts strength" affects crown,
inlay and onlay restorations.
If you find that the contacts proposed by the software are generally too
strong or too weak, you can change them via the menu "Settings"/"Parameters..." according to your requirements.
If you set a higher number in the "Proximal contacts strength" text box,
correspondingly more material will be applied to the contact points.
The thickness of the contact points can be adjusted in increments of
25µm between -200µm and 200µm.
NOTICE
Change only after recalculation
This setting acts only on line suggestions. A change to this setting becomes effective only after recalculation of the suggestion.
NOTICE
Inadequate suggestions for contact points
The proximal contact points are determined by the software by analyzing your measured data. Poor quality of the acquisition data can lead
to inadequate suggestions regarding the contact points.
The setting of the parameter "Proximal contacts strength" has no influence on the design of crown and bridge frameworks.
4.8.3.1.2
Occlusal contacts strength
With this parameter you can set the contact thickness to be produced in
connection with "Virtual grinding".
The thickness of the contact points can be adjusted in increments of
25µm between -200µm and 200µm.
4.8.3.1.3
Occlusal offset
If you find that all of your restorations have too little or too much material
in the occlusal direction, you can compensate for this with this parameter.
The occlusal offset can be adjusted in increments of 25µm between 500µm and 500µm.
68
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
A
B
Increasing the occlusal offset (exaggerated representation)
A
z offset
B
Restoration
NOTICE
Visible only on milling
This setting affects the restoration only on milling. The effect is not visible in the milling preview.
The setting of the parameter "Occlusal offset" has no influence on the design of crown and bridge frameworks.
4.8.3.1.4
Minimum thickness
With these parameters you can set the desired minimum material thickness. This is also already visible during the design phase if the "Minimal
thickness" checkbox is selected under "Window" / "Display options".
The parameters "Minimal thickness (occlusal)" and "Minimal thickness
(radial)" influence the minimum wall thickness geometry for veneers, in-
lays, onlays and crowns only. Different values can be set for the occlusal
and radial perspectives.
4.8.3.1.5
Margin thickness
Prior to milling of inlays, the margin of the restoration is thickened by the
set thickness.
The "Margin thickness" can be adjusted in increments of 25 µm from 0 µm
to 200 µm.
A
A
Margin thickness A (exaggerated representation)
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
69
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Menu bar
Operator's manual
4.8.3.1.6
Veneer thickness
This parameter allows you to set the initial veneer thickness (A) for veneer
restorations using the following design techniques:
● "Biogeneric"
● "Biogeneric reference"
Veneer thickness
The "Minimal thickness (Veneer)" can be adjusted in increments of 100
µm from 0 µm to 2000 µm.
In the case of a minimum thickness below 500µm, these are referred to
as thin veneers. In this case, "e.max CAD" is available as material.
4.8.3.1.7
Adhesive gap
Description
If you find that all of your inlay restorations turn out to be too large, you
can compensate for this by modifying the adhesive gap.
If you set a larger number in the "Adhesive gap" text box, the adhesive
gap will be enlarged correspondingly. The size of the adhesive gap can
be varied in increments of 10 µm from 0 µm to 150 µm.
NOTICE
This setting affects the calculation of the restoration.
Recommended inLab settings
Recommended setting:
4.8.3.1.8
Scanner, CAM base model with
powder
50 µm
Scanner, CAM base model without powder
80 µm
Spacer
Description
The program enables you to consciously create space for the adhesive
bonding of the crown or inlay using the Spacer spin box.
70
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
A
C
B
Spacer (exaggerated representation)
A
Restoration
B
Spacer
C
Residual tooth
If you increase the value, more space will be created. The setting can be
adjusted in increments of 10µm between -100µm and 100µm.
NOTICE
This setting affects the calculation of the restoration.
Recommended inLab setting
Recommended setting:
When using powder
-60 µm
Plaster model without powder (framework)
-30 µm
Spacer for substructures
A
B
Spacer (exaggerated representation), for substructures
4.8.3.1.9
A
Spacer
B
Restoration solidly seated
Scan step width
When using the laser scanner to acquire an optical impression, you can
set the resolution with "Scan step width".
Description
You can select a resolution of between 3 and 5. Setting the scan step
width lower increases the scan time as well as the accuracy of the optical
impression data record.
4.8.3.1.10
Veneering thickness
This parameter is only used for crown and bridge frameworks with antagonist images. You can set the desired veneering thickness here.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
71
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Menu bar
Operator's manual
If "Antagonist" the "Interocclusal Clearance" is activated in the window,
the positions whose distances from the antagonist are shorter than the
set veneering thickness are highlighted in red.
Veneering thickness
The "Veneering thickness" can be adjusted in increments of 0.1 mm between 0.0 mm and 5.0 mm.
4.8.3.1.11
WaxUp wall thickness
You can use this parameter to set the desired thickness of the ceramics
in the bridge abutments for wax-up (A). This parameter only works on preparation limits that are drawn in.
Minimum wall thickness
The "WaxUp wall thickness" can be adjusted in increments of 0.1 mm between 0.0 mm and 2.0 mm.
72
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
4.8.3.1.12
Gingival spacing (bridge FrameWork)
Here you can set the distance from the bottom of the bridge elements to
the gingiva.
Gingival spacing
The gingival spacing can be adjusted in increments of 0.1 mm between 1.5 mm and 2.5 mm.
4.8.3.1.13
4.8.3.1.13.1
Abutment parameters
Gingival depth
Gingival depth
With this parameter, you can set the desired depth of the preparation
margin below the gingival margin on the gingival cavity (B) for the design
of implants.
Gingival depth
The "Gingival depth" can be set up for restoration type "Implant" in increments of 0.1mm as follows:
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
73
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Menu bar
Operator's manual
● Design technique "Multilayer": between -2 mm and 2 mm
● Design technique "Mesostructure": between 0 mm and 2 mm
You can use this parameter to configure whether the preparation margin
is subgingival (positive parameter value) or supragingival (negative parameter value).
At a value of 0, the preparation line corresponds to the drawn emergence
line.
Alternatively, you can use the preparation line to adjust in the reducing
step with the +/- keys located to the right and left of the R symbol.
4.8.3.1.13.2
Design for abutment crowns
If the "Design for Abutment Crown" checkbox is activated, then the "Telescope angle" and "Shoulder size" parameters are active. The restoration is split up into an abutment and the corresponding crown using these
parameters (see Figure).
If the checkbox is deactivated, then the restoration is reduced above the
preparation line to allow for direct veneering, for example.
74
A
"Telescope angle"
B
"Shoulder size"
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
4.8.3.1.13.3
Pressure on the gingiva
The parameter "Placement pressure" can be adjusted from -2 mm to 2
mm in steps of 0.1 mm.
With this parameter, the size of the abutment (and, if applicable, of the
crown) along the defined emergence line can be altered to increase or decrease the pressure on the gingiva. The parameter's maximum effect is
directly on the emergence line, attenuating subgingivally and supragingivally.
4.8.3.1.14
Multilayer (lingual opening angle)
The parameter "Lingual open angle" influences the geometry of the pontic
on the basal/lingual side. The parameter can be switched off, or can have
a value from 0° to 45°. The value must be set before calculation of the first
suggestion.
Lingual opening angle 20°
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
Lingual opening angle 45°
75
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Menu bar
Operator's manual
4.8.3.1.15
Parameters for milling models
When producing a model, several settings with regard to the milling/design process are required.
You can make the settings for all parameters via the "Settings"/"Parameters..." menu item.
The edited parameter values are saved with the model data record. If a
restoration is loaded, the corresponding parameters are automatically
loaded along with it and used.
NOTICE
Factory settings
The unit was set up optimally during final testing at the factory.
You can check the following parameters and modify them, if necessary:
● "Segment cut width"
● "Pin spacing [mm]"
● "Correction offset x [mm]" (in each case for the small and large model
base plate)
● "Correction offset y [mm]" (in each case for the small and large model
base plate)
● "Correction offset z [mm]" (in each case for the small and large model
base plate)
● "Pin length [mm]"
● "Pin diameter [mm]"
NOTICE
Never change parameters for the small and large model plate without
authorization. You will be informed of any settings required here by Sirona.
empty
Segment cut width
The width of the saw cut can be determined using these parameters. The
value can be set in a range from 0.2 to 0.4 mm.
empty
Pin spacing [mm]
The pinhole distance can be determined using this value. Never change
this value without authorization. You will be informed of any settings required here by Sirona.
empty
Correction offset x [mm]
Set an offset in x direction on the model base plates. Never change this
value without authorization. You will be informed of any settings required
here by Sirona.
76
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
empty
Correction offset y [mm]
Set an offset in y direction on the model base plates. Never change this
value without authorization. You will be informed of any settings required
here by Sirona.
empty
Correction offset z [mm]
Set an offset in z direction between the model base plates. Never change
this value without authorization. You will be informed of any settings required here by Sirona.
empty
Pin length [mm]
Set the pinhole depth. The value is set in a way that the pin lines up with
the base of the segment. The value can be set in a range from 5.00 mm
to 6.00 mm.
empty
Pin diameter [mm]
The diameter of the pinhole can be set using this value, should it be difficult to push pins or in case they fall out. The value can be set in a range
from 1.8 mm to 2.2 mm.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
77
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Menu bar
Operator's manual
4.8.3.2
Instruments
inLab
Also refer to the chapter on "Changing milling instruments" in the operating instructions.
1. Select the "Settings"/"Instruments" menu item.
NOTICE
Multiple milling units connected
If several milling units are connected, a dialog box will appear from
which you must select the desired milling unit and confirm with "OK".
2. In inLab MC XL a dialog box is opened in which you can select the
milling set in which you want to change a milling instrument or milling
cutter.
ª The motors run to the position for changing the milling instruments.
The "Change instruments" dialog box opens.
3. Select the milling instrument(s) you would like to change to and click
"Start".
or
➢ Select the milling cutter(s) you would like to change to and click
"Start".
78
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
empty
Description of the "Change instruments" dialog
Heading
inLab dialog
Changing milling instruments or cutters
Explanation using milling cutters
● A, B – The milling instruments or cutters selected in lists A’, B’ are displayed here.
● A’, B’ – You can select the milling instruments or cutters you would
like to insert here.
The milling instrument last inserted is preselected.
● C – The milling instruments or cutters last used are displayed here.
This display remains unchanged even if you click other instruments
under A’, B’.
● D – The calls to action you must implement next are displayed here.
● E – You can select whether only the left, only the right or both instruments are to be replaced here.
● "Start" – Changes the milling instrument or cutter.
● "Cancel" – Operation is canceled.
CAUTION when using milling cutters
NOTICE
Make sure the correct tools are used
Specific tools (milling cutters) are required for milling the models on the
inLab MC XL. The milling cutters will be used as follows:
Set 1: Finisher 10
Set 2: Shaper 25
➢ Do not use the milling instruments for restorations in order to produce models.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
79
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Menu bar
Operator's manual
CAUTION when using milling cutters
NOTICE
Make sure the milling cutters are used correctly
If the milling cutters are not used as described below, this may cause damage to the milling unit.
➢ Use the Shaper 25 and Finisher 10 milling cutters only in inLab MC
XL milling units, as of serial number 120 000 or in inLab XL milling
units that have been upgraded using the motor upgrade kit for inLab
(REF 6338631).
➢ Use the Shaper 25 and Finisher 10 milling cutters only for manufacturing models from the inCoris S model (REF 6299361) and inCoris
L model blocks (REF 6299379).
4.8.3.3
Configuration
This menu item allows for reviewing and modifying factory-set configurations.
● "Devices..."
● "Acquisition system"
● "Save"
● "Odontogram"
● "Options"
4.8.3.3.1
Devices
Graphics: Configuring devices
Configuring devices
Description
Via the menu item "Settings"/"Configuration"/"Devices..." all connected
devices (milling units/inEos) can be displayed and configured. Several
milling units and one inEos can be managed.
A green check mark next to a device denotes its active availability, e.g.
this milling unit can be selected for milling.
80
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
A red cross indicates that this device cannot be selected, e.g. this milling
unit is currently performing a milling operation or its calibration data are
invalid.
A yellow exclamation mark indicates that the current milling program must
be loaded into the milling unit (see Operating Instructions for the milling
unit).
4.8.3.3.1.1
Refresh status
You can use the "Refresh status" button to refresh the status display, e.g.
check whether a milling unit has in the meantime finished milling.
4.8.3.3.1.2
Add automatically
The function "Add automatically" detects any and all devices (milling
units/inEos) connected to the PC. If a new device is detected, a dialog
box for entering the name of the detected device automatically appears.
4.8.3.3.1.3
Add manually
Units which cannot be operated at the maximum speed of 115,200 baud
must be entered manually. This normally proves necessary only when
longer cable connections or certain radio modules (e.g. Futaba, 19,200
baud) are used. Using the "Add manually" button, you can add these devices and enter the following information in the dialog box which then appears:
● Description
● Interface
● Baud (transmission speed)
4.8.3.3.1.4
Remove
A connected device can be removed by clicking the "Remove" button in
the main configuration dialog. The calibration data are not deleted in this
case. If the device is added again, the corresponding calibration data will
be reloaded and used.
4.8.3.3.1.5
Configure (inLab)
Graphics: device configuration
inLab device configuration
Description
With the "Configure" button you can subsequently edit the name and connection settings and configure various parameters.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
81
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Menu bar
Operator's manual
● "inLab gearhead installed"
● "Large watertank"
● "Scanner"
4.8.3.3.1.5.1
Scanner
A check mark must be placed in front of "Scanner" for inLab .
4.8.3.3.1.5.2
inLab gearhead
If the gearhead looks like the one shown in the figure, a check mark must
be set in the box in front of "inLab gearhead installed" .
With inLab gearhead (check mark set)
empty
Retrofit
If the inLab gearhead (optional) is retrofitted in the milling unit, your service engineer must set a check mark in the box in front of "inLab gearhead
installed" .
If the inLab gearhead looks like the one shown in the figure, check the box
in front of "inLab gearhead installed"to make sure that no check mark is
set.
With inLab gearhead (check mark NOT set)
4.8.3.3.1.5.3
Large water tank
If the 25-liter canister (option, Order No. 60 56 217) is connected and the
check mark has been placed, you will not be reminded to change the water until a later point in time.
empty
Retrofit
If the 25-liter canister is retrofitted, your service engineer must place a
check mark in the box in front of "Large watertank" .
82
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
4.8.3.3.1.6
Configuration (inLab MC XL)
Configuring graphic devices
Configuring devices
Description
You can change various settings later on via the "Configure" button in the
"Configure Devices" dialog.
empty
Manual block fixing
Manual block fixing
When using the manual block clamp, the check mark must be set in front
of "Manual Block Fixation".
Milling models
Models can only be milled using manual block fixation.
empty
Title: Deactivating the inLab milling set
Deactivating a milling set
Description of deactivation of bur set
It may sometimes prove necessary to deactivate a bur set, e.g. as long
as it is not possible to replace a defective milling instrument or in case a
milling motor is defective or cannot be calibrated.
In all of these cases, you can deactivate sets 1 and 2 separately in the
"Device Configuration" dialog box. A deactivated set will simply be ignored during milling, calibration etc.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
83
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Menu bar
Operator's manual
NOTICE
Risk of collision
The restoration may become damaged if longer milling instruments are
present in the deactivated bur set than in the active set.
➢ Ensure that milling instruments installed in the deactivated bur set
are no longer than those in the active set.
empty
Scanners for inLab MC XL
Scanner
If you use the internal scanner, the check box in front of "Scanner" must
be ticked.
empty
Bar code reader
Bar code reader
If a bar code reader is used, the corresponding box must be activated.
The bar code reader will then always be used to read a bar code, even
when the scanner is also active. The scanning function can, however, still
be used in this case.
4.8.3.3.2
Acquisition system
Acquisition system configuration
Via the "Settings"/"Configuration"/"Acquisition system" menu item you
can select the following:
● "3D camera"
● "Scanner"
● "inEos"
4.8.3.3.3
Save
Saving the configuration
84
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
Via the "Settings"/"Configuration"/"Save" menu item you can:
● "Connect database"
An existing SIRONA database is used for patient data and images.
4.8.3.3.4
Odontogram
Odontogram configuration
Via the menu item "Settings"/"Configuration"/"Odontogram" you can
select either the US or the international odontogram.
4.8.3.3.5
Options
Graphics: options
Options
Description
The "Options" configuration dialog box offers several groups of functions
which can be selected and deselected:
Option group configuration dialog
● "General"
● "Camera acquisition"
● "Restoration"
● "inEos"
empty
General description
General
In the "General" group, you can select or deselect the following options:
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
85
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Menu bar
Operator's manual
inLab general group
● "Show all warnings and messages"
● "Complete New dialog"
● "Open internet portal"
empty
3D camera (camera exposure)
Camera acquisition
In the "Camera acquisition" group, you can set the following option for exposures taken with the CEREC Bluecam:
● "Automatic capture"
empty
inLab restoration
Restoration
In the "Restoration" group, you can select or deselect the following options:
● "Prevent full reduction below minimum material strength"
empty
inEos
inEos
In the inEos group, you can select or deselect the following options:
● "Use marked calibration parts"
4.8.3.3.5.1
Show all warnings and messages
If you have hidden individual warnings (checkmark in front of "Do not display this warning again."), they can be displayed again by placing a
checkmark in front of "Show all warnings and messages".
86
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
4.8.3.3.5.2
Complete New dialog
If a check mark is NOT placed in front of "Complete New dialog" , the new
dialog box shown below is activated.
Check mark NOT set
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
87
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Menu bar
Operator's manual
If a check mark is placed in front of "Complete New dialog" , the new dialog box (complete) shown below is activated.
Check mark set
4.8.3.3.5.3
Open Internet portal
When the check mark is set here, the CEREC Connect Portal is opened
by clicking on the "Connect" icon.
If the check mark is not set, clicking on the "Connect" icon opens Windows Explorer and it is possible to save the data record to a removable
storage medium in the same way as the "Export…" function in the "Restoration" menu.
88
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
4.8.3.3.5.4
Automatic acquisition (with CEREC Bluecam only)
For impressions acquired using the CEREC Bluecam, you can use the
"Automatic capture" option to set the sensitivity to blurring of the automatic acquisition procedure. The setting options are available:
Automatic acquisition (Bluecam only)
● "very strict"
● "strict"
● "standard"
● "tolerant"
● "very tolerant"
4.8.3.3.5.5
Prevent reduction below the minimum material thickness
If this option is checked, the minimum thickness of the restoration material will be considered during reduction.
4.8.3.3.5.6
Use marked calibration parts
Tick this option if you use a blue-marked calibration part B and a bluemarked calibration cylinder. After this, perform a complete inEos calibration (see inEos Operating Instructions).
4.8.3.4
Calibration
Introduction
Graphics
Under the menu option "Calibration" you can...
3D camera list
● calibrate the "3D camera",
3D camera must be selected as the acquisition system (see chapter
on “Calibrating the Bluecam/3D camera” in the Operating Instructions
for the acquisition unit).
NOTICE
Calibrating the Bluecam/3D camera
For calibration of the Bluecam/3D camera, you will require the "Bluecam
calibration set"/"3D calibration set".
The "Bluecam calibration set"/"3D calibration set" must not be powdered.
Scanner list
● calibrate the "Scanner" (see chapter on “Calibrating the scanner” in
the Operating Instructions for the milling unit).
inEos list
● calibrate the "inEos" device (see chapter on "Calibrating" in the inEos
Blue Operating Instructions).
Milling unit list
● calibrate the "Milling unit" (see chapter on “Calibrating the milling unit”
in the Operating Instructions for the milling unit).
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
89
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Menu bar
Operator's manual
4.8.4
Window menu
Window menu configuration
Graphics: Window menu
Using the menu "Window" , you can change the arrangement of the various viewing windows on the screen and refresh the screen display.
Restoring the default settings
You can restore the default setting for the display of the windows/tool bar
on the screen:
"Window" / "Reset" or "Ctrl+R"
Views
The following views and windows are available for assessment and editing purposes:
● "Display options"
● "Image catalog"
● "3D Preview"
● "Cursor"
● "Distance"
● "View"
● "Design"
● "Tool bar"
● "Status bar"
Note on displayed windows
NOTICE
Displayed windows
Displayed windows/bars are identified by a check mark in front of the
menu item.
4.8.4.1
Display options
inLab graphics
Description
In the "Display options" window, the current state of the 3D display is
shown and can be adjusted individually.
● Check mark next to "ON" - object visible
● Check mark next to "transp." - object is displayed transparently
90
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
If a box is shown in gray, this option is not available in this state (design
technique, design step, image material).
4.8.4.1.1
Minimum thickness
If this option is checked, a minimum thickness geometry which is set in
the parameter dialog box is displayed (see Minimum thickness [ ➙ 69]).
4.8.4.2
Image catalog
Description for inLab
Using the function "Window"/"Image catalog" you can show or hide the
"Image catalog".
You can manage the image fields of the preparation, of the occlusion and
of the antagonists in the "Image catalog" window (see "Image catalog [ ➙
117]“).
4.8.4.3
3D Preview
Description
You can show or hide the 3D preview via "Window"/"3D Preview".
You can manage the image fields of the preparation, of the occlusion/articulation and of the antagonists 3-dimensionally in the "3D Preview" window (see "3D Preview" [ ➙ 122]).
inEos Blue only
The 3D preview can only be used for scans with inEos Blue.
4.8.4.4
Cursor
Description
Graphics: Cursor
In the "Cursor" window, the current position of the cursor (arrow tip) in the
active window is displayed as an absolute value. The zero point of the absolute cursor position is located in the distal and the lingual (or buccal) direction from the model.
The first line shows the x, y value at the cursor position.
The second line shows the height value at the cursor position.
Description of graphics
The third line shows the point (x, y value) of the fissure with the minimum
distance from the cavity bottom (only for the "Biogeneric" design technique).
The fourth line specifies the minimum fissure height at this point (only for
the "Biogeneric" design technique).
Positioning windows
You can drag the "Cursor" window with the mouse by grabbing its title bar
and drop it at any position on the screen.
4.8.4.5
Distance
If you select the function "Window"/"Distance", the "Distance" window is
displayed.
✔ The "Distance" window opens.
1. Left-click to set the desired starting point of the distance to be measured.
2. Move the mouse to the desired end point.
3. Left-click to set the end point.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
91
User interface
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Menu bar
Operator's manual
empty
Changing the position of the blue line:
1. Drag the red pin at the end of the blue line with the left mouse button
pressed.
2. Release it anywhere you want.
The first line shows the 3-dimensional distance between the starting and
end points of the blue line.
The second line shows the height difference between the starting and end
points of the blue line.
You can drag the Distance window with the mouse by grabbing its title bar
and drop it at any position on the screen.
4.8.5
“?” menu
inLab graphics
Description
With the "?" menu, you can
Help
● start the Help function (online help)
"?"/"Help" or function key "F1"
Info Options
● display information about the active restoration
"?"/"Info Options..."
Softguard info
● display information about the connected softguard dongle (activation
key)
"?"/"Softguard info..."
Info on inLab
● call up information about the current program version
"?"/"Info on inLab..."
4.8.5.1
Help (online help)
The online help function gives you instructions on the steps to be performed.
To start help, call up the menu item "?"/"Help" or "F1".
A dialog box appears that contains a variety of help topics you can select
and have displayed.
4.8.5.2
Info options
Description
In the "Options" window you receive information about the active restoration.
Status of restoration
You can also see the status of the restoration here.
● "unfinished": Restoration still in progress
● "milled": Restoration was milled with the inLab milling unit
● "sent": Restoration was sent to infiniDent
92
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
User interface
Operator's manual
4.8.5.3
Softguard info
The "Softguard" window contains information about the connected Softguard dongle (activation key).
NOTICE
Multiple milling units connected
If several milling units are connected, a dialog box will appear from
which you must select the desired milling unit and confirm with "OK".
NOTICE
Milling unit not switched on
If the milling unit is not switched on/connected or the current software
has not been downloaded to the milling unit, the following message appears "Milling unit not ready": The milling unit name entered in the "Description" field during the login appears as the "milling unit".
4.8.5.4
Identifier 0
=
CEREC 3 milling unit / Scan
(serial no. < 5000)
Identifier 1
=
inLab milling unit (serial no. >/= 5000)
Identifier 2
=
CEREC 3 milling unit / Scan
(serial no. >/= 5000)
Identifier ??
=
no milling unit detected
(check the connection to the milling unit and the
communication settings)
Identifier 32
=
CEREC MC XL
Identifier 48
=
inLab MC XL
Info about program
Info about inLab
In the "Info on inLab..." window you receive information about the current
program version.
Access via link
If you have installed an internet access, you can access our internet website directly by clicking the "Homepage" link.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
93
Optical impression
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Scans with inEos Blue
Operator's manual
5
Optical impression
5.1 Scans with inEos Blue
5.1.1
General
Acquisition methods
You have three modes for executing scans with inEos Blue:
● Grid acquisition
–
For large scans with 9 or more units
–
Long, untoothed areas
● Free scan
–
For scans with up to and including 8 units
–
For additional scans at different angles
● Rotational scan
–
For the surveying of single tooth stumps
–
For single restorations without consideration of the proximal contacts or the antagonist
You can execute several scan modes in sequence.
You can omit a scan mode if, for example, it is not suitable for your model.
5.1.1.1
Scan models
Materials
You can scan all materials that correspond to the following criteria:
● Non-reflecting
● Nontransparent
● No transparent parts
● Not highly absorbent
(e.g. heavily colored plasters)
Unscannable materials generate artifacts in the image.
Tip: When using plasters that do not meet the above criteria, you must
powder the affected areas. Otherwise the measuring accuracy will be impaired considerably.
The following are suitable for this purpose: CEREC Optispray (REF
61 44 179)
For scanning with inEos Blue, we recommend using CEREC Stone BC
plaster (REF 62 37 502).
● When preparing saw-cut models, be careful not to mill off the single
stump segments. Place the model next to the stumps so that the
scanner can properly capture these areas.
Saw-cut etc.
● Create only a slight fluting below the preparation margin.
94
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impression
Operator's manual
5.1.1.2
Focusing the image
➢ Turn the rotary buttons for height adjustment.
ª The sharpness adjustment changes.
The image is then sharpened if the relevant areas are not red.
Left: Scan clear; Right: Scan unclear
empty
Object unclear
If the object is unclear while the image is being acquired, the error message "Object out of focus! Move camera down!" or "Object out of focus!
Move camera up!" appears.
Sharpen the image and take a new scan.
5.1.1.3
Overlap area during acquisition
If images are acquired via free scans, each image must overlap with the
previous image. This overlap area must comprise roughly half of the
image.
empty
Overlapping insufficient
If the overlap with the previous scans is not sufficient, the software cannot
assign the image. The error message "No matching data found" appears.
Select a section that has a larger overlap with previously acquired images
or reduce the tilt.
5.1.1.4
Deleting images
empty
Deleting images
You can delete completed scans by right-clicking on the active scan icon
(e.g. "Preparation"). Each further click deletes the last scan.
5.1.1.5
Operating the foot switch
You can use the foot switch instead of the start button of the inEos Blue.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
95
Optical impression
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Scans with inEos Blue
Operator's manual
5.1.2
5.1.2.1
Raster scans
Preparing the model
1. Secure the model to the model holder included. The labial side faces
the fixing screw.
2. Release the ball and socket joint.
3. Align the model:
The model is horizontal and the front teeth stand parallel to a triangle
side.
4. Remove the sliding block from the model holder.
5.1.2.2
Taking a scan
NOTICE
Do not damage the shifting plate
Do not apply any pressure to the model when it is located on the shifting
plate. Doing so could damage the shifting plate.
Tip: Do not change the position of the ball-and-socket joint during acquisition.
1. Place the model holder on the shifting plate. The small balls must
lodge in the longitudinal and transverse grooves. The tip of the model
holder plate and the oral side of the model face the column of the inEos Blue.
96
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impression
Operator's manual
2. Click the icon for grid scans.
ª A section of the model appears in the the live image.
3. Slide the model until you can begin scan acquisition on a distal side.
4. Focus the image with the rotary knobs for height adjustment; see Focusing the image [ ➙ 95].
Do not touch the rotary knobs during the image acquisition process.
5. Single-click the Start button of the inEos Blue.
ª The image is acquired.
6. Add additional scans from adjacent areas: Move the model in the
desired direction by one stop position and repeat steps 4 to 5.
If you do not require any further grid scans, you can change to the next
acquisition mode; see Free scans [ ➙ 97] or Rotational scans [ ➙ 99].
Tip: If a bite registration is to be acquired, additional mesial and distal
areas also must be scanned. These areas must not be concealed by the
bite registration.
5.1.3
Free scans
You can also take detail scans from different angles in this mode.
You can use detail scans for example to detect undercuts which were not
detected by the overview scans.
5.1.3.1
Preparing the model
1. Press the triangular glide foot on to the bottom of the model holder
until the glide foot clicks into place.
ª The model holder can be moved into any position across the shifting plate.
2. Secure the model to the model holder included. The labial side faces
the fixing screw.
3. Release the ball and socket joint.
4. Align the model:
The model is horizontal and the front teeth stand parallel to a triangle
side.
5.1.3.2
Taking a scan
The Free Scan mode offers a variety of options for image acquisition.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
97
Optical impression
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Scans with inEos Blue
Operator's manual
empty
Acquisition with the Start button
Double-click the Start
button
A single exposure will be acquired.
Single-click the Start
button.
The crosshairs turn blue. The system will automatically acquire new images after you move
the model or reset the image focus.
If you want to interrupt the automatic scan, single-click the Start button of the inEos Blue. The
crosshairs turn green.
Use the Start button to acquire additional exposures.
Tip: When taking detail scans, interrupt the automatic scan to continue at a different model
location. This location must overlap roughly
one half of the image previously scanned.
empty
Acquisition with the foot switch
Actuate the foot switch A single exposure will be acquired. The model
once
must be motionless and set in focus.
Press and hold down
the foot switch
The crosshairs turn blue. The system will automatically acquire new images after you move
the model or reset the image focus.
To interrupt the automatic scan, simply let go
of the foot switch. The crosshairs turn green.
You can acquire additional exposures by reactivating the foot switch.
Tip: When taking detail scans, interrupt the automatic scan to continue at a different model
location. This location must overlap roughly
one half of the image previously scanned.
empty
Taking the scan
1. Click the Free Scan icon.
ª A section of the model appears in the the live image.
2. Slide the model until you can begin scan acquisition on a distal side.
3. Focus the image with the rotary knobs for height adjustment; see Focusing the image [ ➙ 95].
4. Single-click the Start button of the inEos Blue.
ª The first scan is taken and the crosshairs are displayed blue.
5. Add additional scans from adjacent areas: Move the model freely on
the table until you have reached the next acquisition position. As soon
as the model stops moving, the camera is automatically released.
You can turn the model on the shifting plate by up to 30°.
Tip:The new image must overlap approximately one half of the previous image. If necessary, you can turn the model by 180°.
6. Repeat step 5 until all of the required scans have been taken.
98
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impression
Operator's manual
If you do not require any further free scans (including detail scans), you
can change to the next acquisition mode; see Rotational scans [ ➙ 99].
5.1.3.3
Performing detail scans
You can acquire detail scans at any time during the free scan.
1. Tilt the model no more than 30° in the desired direction.
Tip: You can turn the entire model on the shifting plate by 180° if necessary.
2. Double-click the Start button of the inEos Blue.
ª An image is acquired.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until all of the required scans have been taken.
Tip: Align the scanned area as for the overview scan. Tilt the model holder
to an angle of up to 30°.
Multiple scans are required for angles larger than 30°. Start with a small
angle and take additional exposures right afterwards with a larger angle.
Do not turn the model. The lateral alignment must remain the same as for
the overview scans.
5.1.4
Rotational scans
Use the rotational scans to acquire single tooth stumps from all sides.
5.1.4.1
Preparing the model
1. Move the model holder on the rotation mouse to the 0° position.
2. Secure the object (e.g. a tooth stump) with the fill material in the center of the model holder. The longitudinal alignment of the object must
correspond to the model holder's axis of rotation.
3. Tilt the model holder at an angle which enables the undercuts to be
recorded (standard: 60°).
5.1.4.2
Taking a scan
1. Click the icon for rotational scans.
2. Slide the rotation mouse on the shifting plate until the entire object is
displayed in the image field.
The cable of the rotation mouse should point to the right or left, and
not to the front or rear.
3. Rotate the rotation pot until the object remains in the image field in
every position.
4. Focus the image with the rotary knobs for height adjustment; see Focusing the image [ ➙ 95].
5. Click the Start button of the inEos Blue.
ª 8 single scans are taken in rapid succession.
Tip: You can accelerate the computing process.
Align the object so that the distal side points upward.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
99
Optical impression
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Scans with inEos Blue
Operator's manual
5.1.5
Buccal image
✔ You have selected the bite registration technique "Buccal scan".
✔ The image fields "Preparation" and "antagonist" contain images with
buccal sections at a position next to or directly on the preparation.
✔ In the buccal image, both jaws must be moved to the centric jaw re-
lation and an exposure taken that records both jaws at the same time.
✔ If possible, you can exit the model in the Articulator. Otherwise, it is
recommended to fix the model, e.g. with wax, and manually hold it under the camera while supporting the model on the shifting plate.
1. Select the "Table free" exposure mode.
2. Position the model underneath the camera with the anterior teeth
pointing towards you.
3. Ensure that one jaw is located in each half of the image.
4. Focus the image.
5. Trigger an exposure, preferably using the foot switch. In most cases,
one exposure is sufficient.
6. Click on "Next" to access the model calculation step (see Model calculation [ ➙ 127]).
5.1.6
Acquiring impressions
You have selected the bite registration technique "Buccal scan".
empty
Preparing an impression
1. Apply a matte finishing to the areas to be acquired to prevent reflections. An example of a matting agent is CEREC Optispray.
2. Attach the impression tray with the filler material on the rough side of
the round plate.
3. Set the plate into the model holder with the oral side facing the column of the inEos Blue.
empty
Taking scans
It is best to take scans in Free Scan mode. The steps are the same as for
exposures of a model.
Tip: Be careful not to touch the impression tray when shifting the model.
Only touch the model holder.
100
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impression
Operator's manual
1. Place a checkmark in front of "Impression Scan" in the selection dialog.
ª Both sides of the model are displayed in the 3D preview. If you
click the "Next" icon, the model will be reconstructed from the impression.
2. Check the scan 3D preview. The preparation surface must be completely scanned.
Impressions of the upper and lower jaw can only be registered via an exposure of a corresponding buccal impression. The impression should be
matted, e.g. using CEREC Optispray, and must be positioned under the
camera so that the occlusal plane appears vertically in the live image, and
50% of each half of the jaw is visible.
5.2 Acquisitions with inEos
InEos provides three acquisition techniques for each image field.
When you click e.g. the "Acquire preparation" icon, a dialog box where
you can select the following acquisition techniques is displayed:
● Top view scan
● Rotational scan
● Detail scan
● You can also combine the top view and the rotational scan (see "Rotational scan in top view [ ➙ 104]“).
NOTICE
Model preparation
For a detailed description of the model preparation and the individual acquisition techniques, please refer to the inEos Operating Instructions.
5.2.1
5.2.1.1
Top view scan
Capturing the optical impression
1. Attach the jaw model on the shifting plate provided for that purpose.
NOTICE
Placing plates on the XY table
For top view scans, the shifting plate must always engage in the longitudinal and transverse grooves; otherwise the system is unable to arrange the images properly.
2. Place the shifting plate on the XY table so that the guide balls of the
plate engage in the longitudinal and transverse grooves of the table.
3. Adjust the height of the camera until the object appears in sharp focus
in the live image.
4. Select the "Top view" option button.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
101
Optical impression
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Acquisitions with inEos
Operator's manual
5. Click the "Acquire" button to start the top view scan.
Start at one end of the region you want to scan and take the next
image after engaging the shifting plate in the very next (neighboring)
groove on the table.
NOTICE
Focus of the images
If necessary, you may refocus the camera between the individual images.
NOTICE
Alternative
To start the individual images, you may also double-click the blue button
located in front of the XY table with displacement grid.
5.2.1.2
“Puzzle” dialog box
If the system is unable to auto-position an image, the “Puzzle” dialog box
opens, enabling you to manually fit the image in the right place.
1. Double-click to select the puzzle piece where you want to fit the next
image planned. This piece is highlighted by a red marquee.
2. Holding down the left mouse button, drag the next image to the desired position.
5.2.1.3
Missing images
If you have skipped an image which is necessary, you can take it later at
any time and put it in the right place with the help of the “Puzzle” dialog
box (see ""Puzzle" Dialog"" [ ➙ 102]).
5.2.1.4
Completing views
Once you have finished the top view scan, you can complete any areas
with deficient scan quality, e.g. areas where teeth appear overlapping in
the top view image.
The scan may be completed by one or several additional detail image(s).
These images also may be tilted (see "Detail scan" [ ➙ 103]).
The detail images are placed in separate fields. These fields show red arrows in their top left corners. You can grab the arrowheads with the
mouse and drag the individual detail images to the matching tooth of the
top view image. The arrow color changes to green.
5.2.1.5
Terminating the scan
Once you have completed all image acquisitions in the image field, close
the selection dialog box by clicking "Exit".
Select the next image field or proceed with the program as normal
("Next") and design the restoration.
102
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impression
Operator's manual
5.2.2
5.2.2.1
Rotational scan
Capturing the optical impression
1. Fasten the tooth model in the model holder included in the scope of
supply.
2. Fit the model holder onto the inclined motor axle, which is located in
the rear hole on the XY table.
3. Adjust the height of the camera until the object appears in sharp focus
in the live image.
4. Select the "Rotation" option button.
5. Click the "Acquire" button to start the rotational scan.
5.2.2.2
Terminating the scan
Once you have completed image acquisition, you close the selection dialog box by clicking the "Exit" button.
Proceed with the program as usual ("Next") and design the restoration.
5.2.3
5.2.3.1
Detail scan
Capturing the optical impression
1. Place, fit or hold the tooth below the camera.
ª The tooth to be scanned appears in the live image.
2. Adjust the height of the camera until the object appears in sharp focus
in the live image.
3. Select the option button marked "Additional image".
4. Click the button marked "Acquire" to start the detail scan.
NOTICE
One single image for each image field
In pure detail scan mode, one single image is taken for each image field
required.
NOTICE
Combination with top view scan
All detail images which may be necessary in combination with a top view
scan can be taken here. The number of possible detail images depends
on the PC configuration.
5.2.3.2
Terminating the scan
Once you have completed all image acquisitions in the image field, close
the selection dialog box by clicking "Exit".
Select the next image field or proceed with the program as normal
("Next") and design the restoration.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
103
Optical impression
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impressions with the scanner (inLab, inLab MC XL)
5.2.4
5.2.4.1
Operator's manual
Rotational scan in top view
Increasing the precision
You can increase the precision by combining the top view with one or
more rotational images instead of with individual detail scans. This applies especially in the vicinity of preparation borders on tooth stumps serving as bridge abutments.
5.2.4.2
Capturing the optical impression
1. Remove the prepared single teeth intended for the rotational scan
from the saw-cut model.
2. Place the single teeth in the model holder in succession and align
them as coaxial as possible (i.e. ideally the insertion axis would coincide with the rotation axis) as for the individual rotational scan also.
3. Perform the rotational scans (see chapter "Rotational scan [ ➙ 103]“).
4. Reassemble the saw-cut model.
5. Align the complete saw-cut model in the holder just as you would for
top view scans without a rotational scan. The saw cuts should be
filled (e.g. with powdered wax) to prevent needle artifacts, etc., on the
cuts.
6. Take the top view scan (see "Top view scan [ ➙ 101]“).
5.2.4.3
Further information
Insert the model holder with the stump positioned so that the mesio-distal
alignment of the single tooth corresponds to the alignment of the complete model (also see "Rotational scan [ ➙ 103]"). This speeds up the calculations.
NOTICE
Take few scans
Take as few scans as possible: The program is suitable for any typical
applications – e.g. for two rotational scans combined with one top view
comprising 4-6 individual scans.
Whole-jaw scans combined with more than four rotational scans are
possible, however, they are not advisable due to the high memory requirements and long calculating times involved.
5.3 Optical impressions with the scanner (inLab,
inLab MC XL)
5.3.1
General information
NOTICE
Supplementary and angled optical impressions
Supplementary and angled optical impressions are not possible with the
scanner.
It is not possible to acquire abutment positions with scanbody using the
scanner.
104
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impression
Operator's manual
Preparation of the scan model is described in the Operating Instructions
for the milling unit.
The model is scanned from several directions. Several single images appear in the image catalogimage catalog after scanning.
Reference optical impressions cannot be changed with a double-click.
Based on the selected restoration type, the software decides which scanning technique will be used.
5.3.2
15° scanning technique
This scanning technique is used for inlay and crown preparations. Two
scans are performed:
15°
● one from an angle of 15°
● one from an angle of -15°
15°
5.3.3
45° scanning technique
This scanning technique is used for veneers as well as crown and bridge
preparations that are fastened to a model holder for bridge framework.
Three scans are performed:
● one from an angle of +45°
45°
● one from an angle of -45°
45°
● one from an angle of 0° (occlusal view)
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
105
Optical impression
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impressions with the scanner (inLab, inLab MC XL)
5.3.4
Operator's manual
Crown framework scanning technique
This scanning technique is used for crown preparations that are fastened
to a model holder for bridge framework. One scan is performed.
NOTICE
Display of assignment
If you insert the model in the model holder so that B lies mesially to the
left of groove A, the mesial/distal assignment will be displayed correctly
in the software.
A
B
5.3.5
15°
15° scanning technique for quadrant restoration
NOTICE
Inlay for a quadrant restoration
If an inlay is also to be supplied in connection with a quadrant restoration, first select Inlay as the restoration type in the New dialog box and
begin with this restoration. The quadrant model is then scanned from the
15° direction of view:
– one scan: + 15°
– one scan: -15°
15°
5.3.6
Scanning antagonists
With this scanning technique, one scan is performed from the occlusal
view (0°).
CAUTION
Position of model must not be changed
Make sure that the position of the model is not changed between the
scan of the antagonists and the scan of the preparation.
NOTICE
Image regions
These two image fields do not have to have any corresponding image
regions (neighboring teeth).
106
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impression
Operator's manual
Preparation model with bite registration
1. Place preparation model A into the milling unit with bite registration B
mounted on top. The registration may cover the model over its entire
length.
2. Have model A scanned using attached bite registration B as the antagonist.
3. Then remove registration B from model A without removing the model
from the milling unit.
4. Have the model scanned as the preparation.
5.3.7
Scanning an occlusion
With this scanning technique, one scan is performed from the occlusal
view (0°).
The image field of the occlusion must agree with the image field of the
preparation in the mesial and distal region (see also "General information
on the optical impression" [ ➙ 193]).
1. Insert the occlusion model in the milling unit.
2. Have the occlusion scanned.
3. Then remove the model from the milling unit.
4. Insert the preparation model in the milling unit.
5. Have the model scanned as the preparation.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
107
Optical impression
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impressions with the scanner (inLab, inLab MC XL)
5.3.8
Operator's manual
Scanning WaxUp
Scanning WaxUp
With this scanning technique, the inserted WaxUp model is scanned from
6 different directions.
The top is scanned from angles of +60°, 0° and -60°, while the bottom is
scanned from angles of +15°, 0° and -15°.
108
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impression
Operator's manual
5.4 Optical impressions with the CEREC Bluecam
Note: inLab 3D software on the CEREC acquisition unit
NOTICE
inLab 3D software on the CEREC AC acquisition unit
If you use the inLab 3D software on a CEREC acquisition unit, you can
also acquire optical impressions with the CEREC Bluecam.
5.4.1
Acquisition control
The acquisition control of the Bluecam functions as follows:
empty
Manual acquisition control
✔ A window is opened for a new restoration.
1. Position the cursor on the acquisition icon (e.g. "Acquire preparation").
2. Press the foot control upward and keep it pressed.
ª A live video image appears with a green cross.
3. Release the foot control.
ª The optical impression is automatically transferred to the 3D preview (e.g. the Preparation image field).
4. Additional optical impressions can be captured by repeating steps 1
to 3.
5. By positioning the cursor on another acquisition icon (e.g. "Acquire
occlusion" or "Acquire antagonist") and repeating steps 2-4, additional optical impressions can be captured in the occlusion or antagonist
model
6. To exit the acquisition mode, click the icon marked "Next".
empty
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
109
Optical impression
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impressions with the CEREC Bluecam
Operator's manual
Automatic acquisition control
✔ A window is opened for a new restoration.
1. Position the cursor on the acquisition icon (e.g. "Acquire preparation").
2. Press the foot control upward briefly.
ª As soon as a sharp optical impression can be captured, images
are automatically generated and transferred to the 3D preview.
3. Press the foot control upward briefly.
ª The optical impression is completed.
4. By positioning the cursor on another acquisition icon (e.g. "Acquire
occlusion" or "Acquire antagonist") and repeating steps 2-3, additional optical impressions can be captured in the occlusion or antagonist
model
5. To exit the acquisition mode, click the icon marked "Next".
empty
Changing from automatic to manual acquisition control
If you press the foot control upward and keep it pressed during an automatic exposure, this changes the program back to manual acquisition
control.
5.4.2
empty
Single optical impression
Information on single tooth restoration
Reference optical impression
As a rule, a single optical impression is sufficient for single tooth restorations. It must be taken in the occlusal direction (insertion axis) and is
called reference optical impression.
Selecting the design technique
As soon as you have selected a tooth and a design technique, the "Acquire preparation" icon is activated in the tool bar. The cursor then jumps
to this icon.
110
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impression
Operator's manual
Using the Bluecam
CAUTION
Using the Bluecam
For intra-oral impressions, always use the camera support.
The Bluecam is a high-precision optoelectronic instrument which requires careful handling. Incorrect handling (impacts, dropping) leads to
failure of the Bluecam.
Do not support the camera head (prism) on a tooth.
empty
Camera support
Camera support
Using the camera support helps ensure that the scans are not blurred.
The camera support prevents damage to the prism and contact with the
prepared tooth.
CAUTION
Using the camera support
Clean the camera support by wiping or spraying it with disinfectant prior
to use. Designed for one-time use only.
empty
Preparing the optical impression
Preparing an optical impression
1. Push the camera support onto the camera as illustrated.
Pushing on the camera support
2. Position the camera over the powdered preparation.
Supporting the 3D camera
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
111
Optical impression
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impressions with the CEREC Bluecam
Operator's manual
3. Support the camera with the front part of the camera support on a
tooth so that you can hold it quietly during the acquisition phase.
NOTICE
Powder on the surface of the prism
If the prism touches powdered surfaces, then powder usually remains
on the prism surface and generates dark spots in the image.
The powder can be wiped off from the prism with a soft cloth.
empty
Capturing a Bluecam optical impression
Taking the scan
➢ Take the scan as described under "Acquisition control" [ ➙ 109].
empty
Concluding the optical impression
Concluding the optical impression
➢ To exit the acquisition mode, click the icon marked "Next".
5.4.3
Supplementary optical impressions
empty
Acquiring the neighboring teeth as well
If the neighboring teeth are to be completely imaged as well, then the
image field can be extended by further optical impressions of these teeth.
The overlap area of two neighboring optical impressions should be approx. 8mm.
Overlap area 8mm
✔ You have taken the reference optical impressions as described in the
chapter "Single optical impression" under "Preparing the optical impression" and "Capturing the optical impression".
NOTICE
Insertion axis
The reference optical impression determines the original insertion axis,
which can be modified later, if required.
112
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impression
Operator's manual
1. Click briefly to include the reference optical impression.
2. Repeat the steps described in the section "Capturing the optical impression" of the chapter "Single optical impression" for the mesial
neighbor.
3. Click briefly to include the mesial neighbor.
4. Repeat the steps described in the section "Capturing the optical impression" of the chapter "Single optical impression" for the distal
neighbor.
5. Click briefly to include the distal neighbor.
6. To exit the acquisition process, click the icon marked "Next".
5.4.4
Angled optical impressions
NOTICE
Insertion axis
The reference optical impression determines the original insertion axis
which can be modified later if required (see "Redefining the insertion
axis" [ ➙ 138]).
empty
Additional angled optical impressions
Additional angled optical impressions are possible for the preparation.
They can be used to acquire impressions of regions that are concealed in
the reference optical impression, or to acquire steep walls in more favorable angles.
CAUTION
Proximal undercuts
Proximal undercuts may make it impossible to seat an inlay.
The maximum permissible tilt angle for capturing an additional optical impression of the same area is 20°.
5.4.5
Supplementary and angled optical impressions
NOTICE
Insertion axis
The reference optical impression determines the original insertion axis
which can be modified later if required (see "Redefining the insertion
axis" [ ➙ 138]).
empty
Supplementary optical impressions and additional angled optical impressions
Apart from the reference optical impression, additional supplementary optical impressions and additional angled optical impressions are possible.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
113
Optical impression
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impressions with the CEREC Bluecam
5.4.6
Operator's manual
Optical impressions for quadrant restoration
NOTICE
Insertion axis
The reference optical impression determines the original insertion axis
which can be modified later if required (see "Redefining the insertion
axis" [ ➙ 138]).
For quadrant restoration it is recommended to acquire the prepared teeth
as well as an unprepared neighboring tooth in each case. It can be covered by capturing several supplementary optical impressions.
5.4.7
Acquiring end teeth
empty
End tooth at the distal margin
When end teeth are restored, the end tooth should lie at the distal margin
of the image field.
5.4.8
Acquiring the antagonist
empty
Acquire antagonists directly
Powder the antagonist and acquire it directly. You can record the two acquisitions together with a buccal acquisition (see "Image field of the buccal image [ ➙ 117]“).
empty
Alternative: Acquiring the centric bite registration
The interocclusal relation between the prepared tooth and the antagonist
in the opposite jaw is recorded with the bite registration.
Centric bite registration
1. Place the impression compound on the preparation.
2. Ask the patient to bite down on the impression compound (without
functional movement).
114
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impression
Operator's manual
3. Once the impression compound has hardened, trim it so that the proximal surfaces can be seen from the mesial and distal aspect.
4. Acquire the antagonist.
NOTICE
Image field of the antagonists
The image field of the antagonists must agree with the image field of the
preparation in the mesial and distal region.
5. Remove disturbing marginal information via "Design" / "Correct optical impressions..." (see "Correcting the orientation of bridges" [ ➙
140]).
6. To exit the acquisition process, click the icon marked "Next".
5.4.9
Veneer images
With software V3.80 or higher, the exposure in the anterior tooth region
does not differ from other exposures. Continue acquiring the preparation
from the occlusal/incisal direction.
5.4.10
Acquiring bridge preparations
Acquiring a 3-unit bridge
A
Overlap area
C
2. optical impression
B
1. optical impression
D
3. optical impression
To produce bridge frameworks of up to 3 elements, you can acquire the
tooth situation with the CEREC Bluecam. Make sure there is always dental substance visible in the overlap area of the acquisitions (areas A).
Start by taking the 1st scan on the distal end. Then guide the camera over
the preparation in the mesial direction.
The design of bridge frameworks is described by means of an example
under "Designing a bridge framework" [ ➙ 188].
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
115
Optical impression
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Image fields
Operator's manual
5.5 Image fields
Introduction
An image field can consist of one or more optical impressions.
We distinguish between the following image field types:
Image field types
● Image field of the preparation
● Image field of the buccal image
● Image field of the occlusion
● Image field of the antagonists
● Image field of the articulation
Waiting times
NOTICE
Waiting times
If a large number of optical impressions is used (>50), longer waiting
times may result during reconstruction of the 3D model. The files become very large.
Generally, the following applies: As many optical impressions as necessary, but as few as possible.
5.5.1
Image field of the preparation
Description of individual teeth
Optical impressions can be made of the prepared tooth/teeth in the image
field of the preparation.
5.5.2
Image field of the occlusion
Description
In the image field of the occlusion, optical impressions of a previously existing or of a waxed-up occlusion are possible.
116
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impression
Operator's manual
The image field of the occlusion must agree with the image field of the
preparation in the mesial and distal region.
inLab
Even if you are not using the "Correlation" design technique, a mock-up
can be scanned here as a design aid (e.g. set-up teeth). This scan can be
displayed as a reference image during the design process.
NOTE replication
In the "Biogeneric reference" design technique, the exposures of the replicate must lie within the image field of the occlusion.
5.5.3
Image field of the buccal image
These impressions are possible only if you have selected the following in
the New dialog box: "Bite registration technique" > "Buccal scan".
An exposure in which 50% of the image contains the upper jaw and 50%
of the image contains the lower jaw is usually sufficient in most cases. In
order for the registration to succeed, it is important to ensure that the relevant image information for the preparation and the antagonist show sufficient a buccal proportion.
5.5.4
Image field of the gingiva
Here you can take images of the gingiva. The scanbody can be removed
for these exposures. Alternatively, it is possible to copy the relevant exposure from the image field preparation.
5.5.5
Image field of the antagonists
Description
In the image field of the antagonists, scans of a centric bite registration or
the opposite jaw are possible.
5.5.6
Image field of the articulation
Optical impressions of a dynamic occlusion impression (FGP technique)
are possible in the image field of the articulation. These impressions are
possible only if you have selected the following in the New dialog box:
● "Restoration": "Crown"
● "Design technique": "Articulation"
5.6 Image catalog
5.6.1
General information
Image catalog note
NOTICE
The image catalog can be used only with scanner or inEos optical impressions.
If you are working with inEos Blue or CEREC AC, proceed to chapter
"3D Preview [ ➙ 122]“.
Description
In the processing stage "Optical impression"1 you can perform the following actions:
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
117
Optical impression
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Image catalog
Operator's manual
Assigning an image group to the active region
● Assign an image group to the active region (see "Active region" [ ➙
120])
CEREC/inLab list
● Assign an image to another image field (see "Changing the assignment" [ ➙ 121])
● Move images between the active and the passive area
● Delete images (see "Deleting images" [ ➙ 121])
One step back
NOTICE
Undoing work steps
If the restoration is in an advanced processing status, you can click the
"Undo" icon repeatedly until you return to the "Optical impression" processing status. When doing so you must delete the restoration (if present).
5.6.2
Opening the image catalog
Opening the image catalog automatically
The image catalog opens automatically when it is necessary or possible
to take an image.
Opening the image field manually
To open the image catalog manually, select "Window"/"Image catalog"
from the menu.
1. Displayed on the status bar at the bottom left.
118
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impression
Operator's manual
5.6.3
Design of the image catalog
Image catalog graphics
Image catalog
Description: Design of the image catalog
All three image fields are displayed simultaneously in the image catalog.
When you double-click the title bar of an image field, this image field is
maximized. The other two image fields remain visible as well.
There are two areas within each image field:
●
an active area A
● a passive area B
Button C is used to switch between horizontal and vertical image catalog
division (and vice versa).
If there are multiple images, the panes of the relevant image region automatically increase in size.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
119
Optical impression
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Image catalog
Operator's manual
You can adjust the relevant image region manually by placing the cursor
in area D, pressing and holding the left mouse button, and moving the cursor forward or to the rear.
You can fix the optimal position with button E. In the fixed state the size
of the current image field does not increase with an increasing number of
impressions.
Images which are located in the active region and can be attached to
other images are marked with a green check mark.
Images which cannot be attached to each other are marked with a red
cross.
Successfully reconstructed models are marked with a green check mark
within an image region.
New group
If you drop a scan from the passive area of the image field onto this icon,
you can assign the scan to a new active group (detail scan or rotational
scan).
Preview format
With this icon you can set the zoom factor of the display in the image catalog.
Each image is displayed in the image catalog as a thumbnail (preview).
You can choose a preview format in steps ranging from 1:10 to 1:2.
Definition of reference optical impression
The first optical impression of the image field is called reference optical
impression and is surrounded by a red frame. It must be taken in the occlusal direction (insertion axis).
5.6.4
Redefining the reference optical impression
To define another image as the reference optical impression, double-click
the desired image.
5.6.5
Active region
Description
Each time you click another scanning icon, an existing image group1 is
pushed out of the active region (not deleted). The last image group scanned is located in the active region. You can press and hold down the left
mouse button to drag an image group located outside of the active region
back inside the active region.
1. All of the images generated by a single scanning operation. They all have the
same time stamp.
120
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impression
Operator's manual
CAUTION
Confirming the image catalog with Next
An image group may be located in the active region only if you confirm
the image catalog with the "Next" icon.
5.6.6
Zooming in
When you point to an image with the mouse cursor, the image is displayed in its original size.
5.6.7
Changing the assignment
Note on inEos
NOTICE
inEos
Only rotational images and detail images can be moved between the
image fields. They always land in the passive area.
1. Holding down the left mouse button, drag the image you want to
move to the “other” image field.
Instructions
2. Release the mouse button.
ª The image is now assigned to "another" image field.
3. In order to activate the image after this, drag the scan onto the icon
marked "New group".
5.6.8
Within an image field (inEos)
NOTICE
Moving images
Only rotational images and detail images can be moved between the active and passive area and the recycle bin within an image field.
5.6.9
Deleting images
You can drag an unusable scan onto this button to discontinue using it.
1. Holding down the left mouse button, drag the image you want to delete to the recycle bin icon.
2. Release the mouse button.
ª The image is deleted.
5.6.10
Opening the recycle bin
1. Click the recycle bin.
ª The recycle bin opens and displays all of the scans it contains.
2. Move the desired scan back to the passive area if necessary.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
121
Optical impression
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
3D Preview
Operator's manual
5.6.11
"Puzzle" dialog box for top view scan (inEos)
1. Double-click a top-view scan
Instructions
2. Drag the scans to the right location manually if necessary.
inLab cross-reference
Place scan in correct location, see ""Puzzle" dialog box". [ ➙ 102]
Description
The “Puzzle” dialog box has a separate recycle bin.
5.6.12
Rotational image (inEos)
When you double-click a rotational image, the display changes between
overview image and single optical impression..
5.6.13
Displaying the height image
Right-click the thumbnail image in the image catalog. The height image is
displayed. To close the height image, right-click the height image once
again.
5.6.14
Closing the image catalog
The image catalog closes automatically when you click the "Next" icon
and the system succeeds in reconstructing a 3D model from all active
images.
To close the image catalog manually, select "Window"/"Image catalog"
from the menu.
5.7 3D Preview
5.7.1
General information
Note on inEos Blue
The 3D preview can only be used for scans with inEos Blue or CEREC
AC. If you are working with an inEos or with the scanner, go to chapter
"Image catalog [ ➙ 117]“.
Description
In the default setting, the data are displayed from the occlusal direction in
the 3D preview. You can freely select the viewing direction of the 3D model in the 3D preview window with the mouse (left-click, hold button
pressed and move mouse).
5.7.2
Opening the 3D Preview
The 3D preview opens automatically when it is necessary or possible to
acquire an optical impression.
To open the 3D preview manually, select "Window" / "3D Preview" .
122
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impression
Operator's manual
5.7.3
Design of the 3D Preview
3D Preview
Design of the 3D Preview
A
Scroll arrow
E
Docking bar
B
Change view
F
Passive folder
C
Thumbnails
G
Recycle bin
D
3D overall view,
active region
H
Zoom function,
appears only if the mouse pointer is moved to the right margin
of the window.
Description of the design of the 3D Preview
In the 3D preview, scans are displayed in the following three image fields:
● Preparation
● Occlusion/articulation/buccal (if present)
● Antagonist (if present)
The design inside the image field is identical.
If images are located in the active region and can be attached to other
images, the thumbnails are marked with a green check mark.
Thumbnails which cannot be attached to each other are marked with a
red X.
The window with the 3D preview and the panes of the individual image
fields in the 3D preview can be minimized, maximized, and restored to
their default size. You can click the following icons at the top right edge of
the window:
● Minimize
● Maximize
● Restore
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
123
Optical impression
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
3D Preview
Operator's manual
5.7.4
Symbol for reference optical impression
The reference optical impression is marked by a green circle with a white
dot.
To select another image as the reference optical impression, double-click
the desired thumbnail. As you can see, the green circle with the white dot
is adapted accordingly.
5.7.5
Numbering of optical impressions
Each thumbnail has a white number in a blue circle (based on the acquisition date). All optical impressions/thumbnails in each image field are
numbered consecutively according to this principle.
Depending on the current size of the window, the scrolling arrows (B) located to the left and right of the docking bar may be activated for scrolling
in case of multiple thumbnails.
If you move the mouse pointer over the thumbnail, this causes the corresponding part to be highlighted in the 3D overall display. This part is displayed white.
5.7.6
Passive folder
You also have the option of dragging optical impressions which may be
used at a later time from the docking bar to the passive folder (A) and
saving them there. The optical impressions in this folder are saved, and
not deleted.
If you click the folder icon, the folder is opened and its contents, including
all of the optical impressions it contains, are displayed. You can then drag
the optical impressions from the folder to the active region of the 3D Preview. The optical impression is recorrelated in the process.
5.7.7
Copying/moving optical impressions
If you drag an optical impression or a thumbnail from one image field to
another, a small context menu opens after you release the mouse button.
In this menu, you can select whether the optical impression should be copied or moved.
124
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impression
Operator's manual
5.7.8
Displaying the date/time in the intensity image
If you move the mouse pointer over a thumbnail in the docking bar and
keep it there for at least 2 seconds, the intensity image appears to the left
along with the date and time of acquisition in red lettering.
5.7.9
Displaying the height image
If you move the mouse pointer over a thumbnail in the docking bar and
right-click it, the height image appears to the left. To close the height
image, right-click the thumbnail once again.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
125
Optical impression
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
3D Preview
Operator's manual
5.7.10
Zoom function in the 3D Preview
If you move the mouse pointer into the right region of the respective
image field, a slider appears which can be used to change the size of the
thumbnails.
5.7.11
Switching between the view of the rotational scan and the
entire model
Once rotational scans have been executed, switch between the view for
the entire model and the rotational scan by clicking on the B symbol in the
"Preparation" image field.
5.7.12
Deleting images
You can drag an unusable scan onto this button to discontinue using it.
1. Holding down the left mouse button, drag the thumbnail you want to
delete to the recycle bin icon.
2. Release the mouse button.
ª The image is deleted.
If you would like to use a deleted image once again, left-click the recycle
bin icon again (see also "Opening the recycle bin [ ➙ 127]").
Images that have been moved to the recycle bin will be automatically deleted as soon as you click the "Next" button after producing the optical impression.
126
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impression
Operator's manual
Tip: Alternatively, you can move the mouse pointer onto the scan icon
(e.g. "Preparation"). You can then right-click to delete the last scan.
5.7.13
Opening the recycle bin
Open recycle bin
If you click the recycle bin icon, the recycle bin is opened and its contents,
including all of the optical impressions it contains, are displayed. You can
then drag the optical impressions from the folder to the active region of
the 3D Preview. The optical impression is recorrelated in the process.
5.7.14
empty
Closing the 3D Preview
Closing the Preview
Closing the 3D Preview
The "3D Preview" automatically closes when you click the "Next" icon and
it is possible to reconstruct a 3D model from all active images.
You can close the "3D Preview" manually via the menu "Window"/"3D
Preview" .
5.8 Model calculation
NOTICE
This chapter is only relevant if exposures were acquired using an inEos
Blue or the CEREC AC.
Once you have acquired the optical impressions for the preparation, the
buccal image and the antagonist, the system is ready to calculate the 3D
model.
To do this, click the button marked "Next".
5.8.1
Manual Correlation
In this step, you see the models of the preparation, the antagonist and the
buccal image. The buccal image is placed in the center between the preparation and the antagonist.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
127
Optical impression
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Model calculation
empty
Operator's manual
Rotating models
Rotating the preparation and the antagonist
➢ Click in the blue area with the left mouse button and hold the button
down.
ª The preparation and the antagonist can be rotated about the vertical axis simultaneously.
➢ Click on the preparation or the antagonist with the left mouse button
and hold the button down.
ª The arches can be rotated individually.
NOTICE
The prepared jaw is always displayed at the bottom, even if the preparations are located in the upper jaw.
empty
Registering the buccal image on the preparation and the antagonist
1. Rotate both models so that you can see the overlap area of the buccal image and of the preparation and the antagonist. See "Rotating
the preparation and the antagonist" [ ➙ 128].
2. Now drag the buccal image to the corresponding area of the antagonist with the mouse and let go of the mouse button (drag&drop).
ª The buccal image automatically registers itself on the preparation. If the registration was successful, this will be indicated by a
"leopard pattern". If the registration was not successful, the model will start shaking and the buccal image will jump back to its
original position. In this case, you must repeat the drag&drop procedure in order to find a better correlation surface.
3. Now click on the buccal image once again and drag it onto the appropriate surface of the preparation (drag&drop).
ª If the registration was successful, this will be indicated by a "leopard pattern". If the registration was not successful, the model will
start shaking and the buccal image will jump back to its original
position. In this case, you must repeat the drag&drop procedure
in order to find a better correlation surface.
It is irrelevant whether you drag the buccal image onto the preparation or
onto the antagonist first.
128
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Optical impression
Operator's manual
empty
Rotating the buccal image
In some cases, the buccal image may be displayed upside down in relation to the preparation and the antagonist. Proceed as follows in such cases:
➢ Click on the upper area of the buccal image and drag it onto the lower
model.
ª The buccal image will automatically flip, and you can then register
it on the jaw via the drag&drop technique.
This works in the same way vice versa, i.e. if you click on the lower area
of the buccal image and then drag it onto the upper model.
The buccal image is then displayed right side up. Registration is possible
without rotation.
The buccal image is then displayed upside down. When you begin the registration, the software detects this and automatically flips the image right
side up.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
129
Optical impression
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Model calculation
Operator's manual
5.8.2
Occlusal contact points
You can use the "Toggle Contacts" button to check the occlusal contact
points of the jaws.
The same color scheme is used as when displaying the contacts to the
neighboring teeth or to the antagonist.
● blue: Clearance 0-1 mm
● green: Penetration 0-50 µm
● yellow: Penetration 50-100 µm
● red: Penetration >100µm
Using the "Settling" function, the models can be rearticulated manually.
NOTICE
Only execute "Settling" if the model spans all 4 quadrants and you have
ensured that all support points are contained in the model.
130
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Design
Operator's manual
6
Design
6.1 Trimming the preparation
Introduction
After the 3D model of the preparation is displayed in the viewer and before you enter the preparation margin, you can hide image regions of the
preparation, e.g. the mesial and distal neighbors.
Graphics: shortcut Ctrl+B
inLab information
If the 3D model is trimmed in this design step, both the side surfaces and
the bottom are then displayed complete (illustration on the left). With the
"Ctrl+B" shortcut, the model can be displayed without the side surfaces
and without the bottom (illustration on the right).
empty
Instructions
Hiding image regions
1. Rotate the model to a perspective in which you can see all areas that
you want to trim. The model cannot be rotated while you are drawing
the line.
2. Double click in any location to set the start point of the trim line.
Distal neighbor hidden
3. Click to set further points of the line, e.g. in the interdental space.
4. Double click in any position to end the line. Ensure that the closing
end of the line does not cut any areas of the model that you want to
keep.
ª The smaller image region to the side of the line is hidden.
NOTICE
Switching the image region
If it is the wrong image region, you can switch to the other image region
by double-clicking the hidden region.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
131
Design
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Trimming the antagonist
Operator's manual
5. To exit this mode, click the icon marked "Next".
By clicking the "Trim" button, you can simultaneously show or hide all
image regions.
Showing and hiding the preparation
NOTICE
Showing and hiding the preparation
If the preparation was not trimmed, you can use the "Trim" button to
show and hide the entire preparation, e.g. for editing the proximal surface of the restoration.
6.2 Trimming the antagonist
Introduction
This design step can be used in the following, if an optical impression of
the antagonist exists.
inLab 3D
"Restoration"
"Design technique"
"Crown"
● "FrameWork"
● "Reduced"
● "Biogeneric"
● "Biogeneric reference"
● "Articulation"
● "Multilayer"
"Bridge"
● "FrameWork"
● "Reduced"
● "Biogeneric"
● "Multilayer"
"Inlay, Onlay, Partial crown"
● "Biogeneric"
Description
After you have trimmed the preparation, you can hide the image regions
of the antagonist.
Correct trimming of the antagonist is very important for improvement of
the settling results.
This new design step will automatically be skipped if no optical impression has been scanned.
132
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Design
Operator's manual
empty
Instructions
Hiding image regions
Antagonist transparent
In this design step, the antagonist is displayed slightly transparent and the
preparation is simultaneously displayed. This makes it easier for you to
recognize where it makes the most sense to trim the antagonist.
Draw a closed line (e.g. around the impression of the antagonist/registration):
1. Set the starting point with a double-click.
2. Click to set further points.
3. Set the line end by double-clicking.
The area outside the line is hidden.
It is important to remove any regions which should not touch the occlusion
of the new restoration.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
133
Design
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Entering preparation margins, base lines and gingival lines
Operator's manual
With the "Manual Trim" button in the "Antagonist" dialog box you can also
hide image regions at a later point in time.
6.3 Entering preparation margins, base lines and
gingival lines
6.3.1
General information
General CEREC/inLab
NOTICE
Changing the insertion axis and image regions
After entering the preparation margin, you can redefine the insertion
axis or delete and correct image regions as required (see Redefining the
insertion axis [ ➙ 139] and Deleting and correcting image regions in
image fields [ ➙ 140]).
You can enter the preparation margin in the viewer in the 3-dimensional
(3D) representation of the preparation.
NOTICE
Moving not possible during the drawing process
Since the last "drawing click" can be undone by clicking with the right
mouse button, it is not possible to move the 3D model while drawing
(since this is done by pressing and holding down the right mouse button).
Bridge framework designs
For bridge framework designs, the status bar will prompt you to enter the
preparation margins and the base lines1 and base lines2 one after the
other. The order followed corresponds to the selection in the New dialog
box and always begins with the distal tooth.
During the entry of the preparation margin and the base line, you can rotate the 3D display of the preparation.
The preparation margin must always form a closed line.
You can edit the preparation margins and base lines after entering the
last line.
1. for abutments
2. for connectors
134
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Design
Operator's manual
6.3.2
Entering the preparation margin
Entering the preparation margin
1. Start the entry by double-clicking anywhere on the preparation margin.
2. Move the cursor along the preparation margin.
NOTICE
Automatic edge detection
To support the automatic edge detection, click anywhere near the margin on the raised side. There is an automatic correction when the next
point is set.
3. Continue this procedure until you are back at the starting point.
4. Conclude the entry by double-clicking the starting point.
6.3.3
Base lines for pontics
1. Begin the entry with a double-click.
2. Click to set further points of the base line.
NOTICE
Automatic edge detection
The automatic edge detection cannot be used for base lines.
3. Conclude the entry by double-clicking the starting point.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
135
Design
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Entering preparation margins, base lines and gingival lines
Operator's manual
When all the ("Biogeneric" or "Reduced") preparation margins and base
lines for a bridge have been entered, red dots will appear on the restoration to indicate the location of the pontics. These dots mark the pontics'
center for the initial suggestion. You can move these dots to the desired
locations.
6.3.4
Entering a preparation margin with unclear edges
If you press the space bar while entering the preparation margin, the system switches to the interpolating method (spline function) and you can
set individual points by clicking.
NOTICE
Setting points close together
Set the points exactly on the edge and close to one another.
If the optical impressions have been made with the CEREC 3D camera
or with inEos*, the switch is made to intensity image.
*In the case of inEos optical impressions which contain a rotational scan,
or in case of optical impressions made with the scanner, the system does
not switch over to intensity image.
In the case of optical impressions made with the CEREC Bluecam, the
normal model continues to appear. If you wish to see the intensity image
in unclear situations, press the space key once again. When the space
key is pressed for the third time, the system switches to the edge detection method again.
136
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Design
Operator's manual
6.3.5
Gingival line
The gingival line is used in the Mesostructure design technique in order
to produce restorations on implants (see also"Mesostructure design technique" [ ➙ 215]).
empty
Entering the gingival line
1. Begin the entry with a double-click.
Drawing the gingival line
2. Click to set further points of the gingival line.
NOTICE
Automatic edge detection
The automatic edge detection cannot be used for gingival lines.
3. Conclude the entry by double-clicking the starting point.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
137
Design
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Redefining the insertion axis
Operator's manual
6.4 Redefining the insertion axis
6.4.1
Preparing the right insertion axis
CEREC Biogeneric obtains the information it requires from the occlusal
surface and the proximal contact line of adjacent teeth. During the acquisition procedure, all the essential information is recorded based upon the
insertion axis specified by the user: The software stipulates that both levels must be positioned vertically to the insertion axis. If indentations are
created by positioning the insertion axis vertically to the occlusal surface
in the preparatory steps, you must change the direction of the insertion
axis. Deviations of the acquired surface from the actual occlusion have a
negative effect upon the quantity of data available for the biogeneric algorithm. This has the potential to affect the quality of the proposal.
D
E
C
B
F
G
A
A
Tooth contour
E
Preparation
B
Proximal contact line
F
Undercut
C
Occlusal surface
G
Alternative buccal preparation
line
D
Insertion axis
(A) displays the original contour of the tooth to be restored.
The optimum alignment for the insertion axis (D), in order to provide information for the biogeneric algorithm, is vertically to the proximal contact
line (B) and occlusal surface (C).
Should this optimum axis not be positioned for the preparation (E), indentations may occur. (G) shows an alternative buccal preparation line which
would optimize the angle of insertion and enable optimum results from
CEREC Biogeneric.
138
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Design
Operator's manual
6.4.2
Redefining the insertion axis
1. Once you have entered the preparation margin, click the "Next" icon.
With bridge framework
ª The "Insertion axis" window opens.
Regions within a preparation margin that show an undercut from
the viewing direction are marked yellow.
2. Change the position of the preparation such that all yellow markings
disappear. If this is not possible, (e.g. in the case of diverging stumps)
make sure that all preparation margins are completely visible from the
viewing direction and yellow-marked undercuts are as far away as
possible from the preparation margin.
3. In order to achieve and optimum result with Biogenerics, change the
position of the preparation so that the insertion axis is aligned as vertically as possible to the occlusal surface.
4. Then rotate the preparation model so that the model is correctly labeled by the axis designations (mesial<->distal and lingual<->buccal). To do this, rotate the preparation in the occlusal view by
grasping the right or left edge of the screen with the mouse pointer
and then moving the pointer along the edge of the screen.
NOTICE
Bridge frameworks
In the case of bridge frameworks, "lingual<->buccal" must be labeled
correctly at least.
5. Click the "Next" button.
ª The reference coordinate system for all further design steps is
changed.
Rotation without effect
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
139
Design
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Deleting and correcting image regions in image fields
Operator's manual
NOTICE
Rotation while scanning a crown framework model holder
If performed while scanning a crown framework with the model holder,
a rotation about the occluso-cervical axis has no effect.
6.4.3
Correcting the orientation of bridges
If, during the scanning process, the model was fastened to the holder in
such a way that the orientation is false (mesial<->distal and lingual<>buccal reversed), you can correct this.
1. Select "Design"/"Insertion axis".
ª The "Insertion axis" window opens.
2. Rotate the preparation in the occlusal view by 180° by grasping the
right or left edge of the screen with the mouse pointer and then moving the pointer along the edge of the screen. Also make sure that the
direction of view corresponds to the new insertion axis.
3. Click the button marked "Fix".
6.5 Deleting and correcting image regions in image
fields
Before you enter the preparation margin, you can delete and correct
image regions in all image fields (preparation, occlusion, antagonist).
1. Select "Design"/"Correct optical impressions...".
ª The "Correct optical impressions..." window opens.
2. Select the image field type ("Acquire") and "Technique".
Under Technique you can decide:
● whether you want to cut outside or inside a closed line,
● cut to the side of an open line or
● smooth inside a closed line.
140
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Design
Operator's manual
6.5.1
Example 1: Removing a powder spot
Drawing a closed line
1. To correct a powder spot on a level surface, select the corresponding
image field type under "Acquire".
2. Click on "Technique" under "Smooth inside".
3. Draw a closed line.
ª The surface is smoothed.
empty
Drawing a closed line
1. Set the starting point with a double-click.
2. Click to set further points.
3. Set the line end by double-clicking.
6.5.2
Example 2: Deleting disturbing image regions
Drawing a closed line
1. To remove disturbing regions of the bite registration in the image field
of the antagonist, select the "Antagonist" image field type under "Acquire".
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
141
Design
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Deleting and correcting image regions in image fields
Operator's manual
2. Click on "Technique" under "Cut outside".
3. Draw a closed line (e.g. around the impression of the antagonist/registration).
ª The area outside the line is deleted.
empty
Drawing a closed line
1. Set the starting point with a double-click.
2. Click to set further points.
3. Set the line end by double-clicking.
6.5.3
Correction options when milling models
When milling models, you can carry out any desired corrections during
the design process.
"Cut", "Smooth" and "Replace" tools are available to you for this purpose.
Correction tools for milling models
empty
Cut
Parts of the model can be cut away using the "Cut" function.
1. Start to draw a line by double-clicking near to the model.
2. Drag the line in the desired direction and click in order to set further
points of the line.
3. Finish the process by double clicking.
142
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Design
Operator's manual
NOTICE
Cutting away frayed model parts
It is important to cut away any frayed model parts using the "Cut" function, otherwise unfavorable segment levels may occur when milling the
model segments.
empty
Smooth
Areas on the model can be smoothed using the "Smooth" function. The
function is similar to smoothing "Form" and "Drop" tools (see Form tool [➙
42] and Drop tool [ ➙ 43]).
empty
Replace
Areas on the model that you wish to replace can be selected using the
"Replace" function.
1. Select the area by drawing a circle.
2. Start the process by pressing the space bar.
ª The area to be replaced is inserted with the surroundings.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
143
Milling
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Material selection
Operator's manual
7
Milling
7.1 Material selection
When inLab restoration data (FrameWork, WaxUp, Reduced, Bridge, Implant) have been captured, the following dialog will appear when displaying the 3D preparation model:
Material selection
In this dialog box you can choose the material you want to use for milling
the restoration. With crown caps and bridge frameworks, the following
factors are affected by this selection:
● the initial restoration proposal
● the threshold from which the ceramic thicknesses on the status bar
are highlighted in red
–
for connector cross section
–
for cap thicknesses
CAUTION
Red fields
Red fields on the status bar mean that components of the CAD model
are thinner than recommended by the material manufacturer. Note that
the final thickness may differ as a result of milling tolerances and manual
re-working.
When ordering via the Internet, the material selection for all inLab restorations is sent to infiniDent (also see http://www.infinident.de).
144
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Milling
Operator's manual
The ceramic thicknesses / connector cross sections of configurations
which are not recommended (e.g. bridges made of spinel) are always
highlighted in red.
The chosen material is preselected in the "Select block" dialog box, but
may be changed there. If another material is selected there, the shape of
the restoration will not change, which can easily result in material thicknesses that are below the minimum.
The shape of the cap margin and the initial ceramic thicknesses of caps
and connectors depend on the material.
7.2 Milling Preview
After having finished the design of the restoration, you can activate the
milling preview by clicking on the "Next" icon.
The restoration is shown in the viewer exactly as it will be machined by
the milling unit.
You can also use the "Form", "Drop", and "Shape" free forming tools in
the milling preview.
If you click the "Undo" icon inside a tool once, this causes all of the changes made with this tool to be reversed.
If you click the "Undo" icon a second time, you quit the milling preview and
return to the design mode.
CAUTION
Changes
The changes you have made in the milling preview mode using the
"Form", "Drop", and "Shape" tools are then lost.
you can select and change the following:
● Selecting the milling unit
● Block visualization
● Change of sprue location
● "Sinter Support"
7.2.1
Milling unit selection
you can set the following:
● Select the milling unit with which you would like to mill the restoration
("Select" button):
–
MC XL
–
CEREC 3
–
inLab
● The program automatically displays the milling preview according to
the milling instruments you have selected for the respective milling
unit.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
145
Milling
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Milling Preview
Operator's manual
● The Endo mode is automatically activated for crowns in the anterior
tooth region and for veneers.
● You can activate the Endo mode for any type of restoration ("Endo"
check box).
● When using an MC XL milling unit with 4 motors, you can select the
bur set for which the floor simulation is to be reconstructed and displayed.
7.2.2
Block visualization
You can have all of the blocks displayed in the preview.
you can set the following:
● "Block Visualization" option on/off.
● Search for the block you want to mill ("Select" button).
In addition, you also can select whether or not you would like to have the
block holder displayed.
If you deactivate "Show block holder", the restoration in the block is displayed without the block holder.
146
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Milling
Operator's manual
7.2.2.1
General information
In the case of non-VInCrOn restorations (i.e. frameworks and reduced restorations), blocks which are too small can also be selected in the block
preview. If a block which is too small is selected and is shown when the
"Mill" button is clicked, it can be chosen during the block selection and be
used for the processing of the restoration.
If a restoration only fails to fit into the block on account of its height, the
"Position" tool can be used to decide which area to prepare (occlusal or
cervical). In order to prepare this block, the block which is "too small" must
also be selected in the block view.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
147
Milling
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Milling Preview
Operator's manual
7.2.3
Change of sprue location
Description
"Mill Optimized" is set as the sprue location by default. You can also
select another sprue location from the pull-down menu.
The following sprue locations are offered for the specified restoration types by default.
inLab table
Restoration
type
"Mill Optimized"
Other possibility
Inlay/Onlay/Parti- If an extension is available, this Mesial, distal, bucal Crown
applies for the extension.
cal, lingual
Otherwise the prioritization is
as follows: Lingual, buccal, distal, mesial
Crown
Lingual
Mesial, distal, buccal, lingual
Veneer
Distal (1st or 3rd quadrant),
Mesial, distal, cervical, incisal
Mesial (2nd or 4th quadrant)
Crown cap
7.2.4
Side with the deepest point
Mesial, distal, buccal, lingual
Bridges (not Wa- Mesial
xUp)
Mesial, distal
WaxUp
Mesial
Mesial
Positioning the restoration in a multicolored block
You can move the restoration in all spatial directions within the block
using the "Position" tool until the restoration reaches one of the block limits. The limits are signaled by a beep and a red block. If the restoration
is milled on an MC XL milling unit, you can rotate the restoration along the
block holder axis by using the red buttons on the "Rotate" tool. Tip: If you
wish to rotate a front tooth along the mesial-distal axis, for example, before doing so select "Mesial" or "Distal" as the sprue location in the "Milling preview" dialog.
When you click the "Mill" icon, the restoration will be milled in this position
from the block. In the case of restorations milled on an inLab milling unit,
contortion is not taken into account. The restoration is milled in its initial
alignment.
empty
RealLife ™ blocks
Anterior teeth are positioned as an initial suggestion so that the curvature
of the labial surface corresponds as closely as possible to the curvature
of the dentine core. The position of the restoration can be further adjusted
by moving and rotating.
For RealLife ™ blocks, the same positioning options are available as for
simple layered blocks. In addition, the restoration can be rotated around
the tooth axis using the blue surfaces of the "Rotate" tool.
Use the "Form", "Drop" and "Shape" tools before you determine the position of the restoration in the block. As soon as you switch off the block display, all setting for alignment in the block are lost. You should therefore
ensure that the block display remains activated when you start the milling
148
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Milling
Operator's manual
process using the "Mill" icon. The position of the sprue location can no
longer be freely chosen and lies proximally/labially, depending on the rotation of the restoration.
7.2.5
Sinter support
For large bridges (with at least 8 elements), you can decide whether you
would like to mill the restoration with sinter support. If the check mark for
the "Sinter Support" option is set in the "Milling preview" dialog box, the
restoration will be machined with these supports. If no check mark has
been inserted, the bridge will be machined without these supports.
If the restoration is saved with this option, it also can be milled with sinter
support via inLab Stack software.
The "Sinter Support" option is offered only when the material concerned
is zirconia.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
149
Milling
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Starting the milling process
Operator's manual
7.3 Starting the milling process
Introduction
Once you have completed the design and assessed the restoration in the
milling preview, you can mill the restoration.
Graphics: selecting the inLab milling unit
Selecting the milling unit
Description 1
NOTICE
Selecting the milling unit
If several milling units are connected, a dialog box will appear when the
"Mill" icon is clicked, where you must select the desired milling unit and
confirm with "OK" .
➢ Click the "Mill" icon.
inLab graphics
150
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Milling
Operator's manual
Description 2
NOTICE
Selecting a block
When you choose a block which is too small, a warning message is displayed.
1. Select a block and confirm with "OK".
2. Wait until the spindle/workpiece axis has reached the zero position.
CAUTION
Milling chamber door
The milling chamber door must be closed.
3. Open the milling chamber door.
WARNING
Risk of injury on milling instruments!
If you put your hand in the milling chamber, you could injure it on the milling instruments.
Be careful not to brush against the milling instruments with your hand.
4. Insert a ceramic block of the required size and color in the spindle/
workpiece axis (also see Operating Instructions of the milling unit).
CAUTION
Error message during touch process!
Always insert the ceramic block that you selected in the "Select block"
dialog box. Otherwise an error message will be displayed during the
touch process.
5. Close the milling chamber door and start the milling process
(click"Start" ).
CAUTION
Do not activate the sleep mode
The sleep mode of the PC must not be activated during the milling process.
The instruments are measured automatically and milling starts.
The remaining processing time is displayed continuously.
The number of milled restorations is shown so that the service life of the
milling instruments still available can be estimated.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
151
Milling
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Starting the milling process
Operator's manual
CAUTION
Canceling the milling process
You can cancel the milling process at any time by pressing the "Stop"
button.
WARNING
Risk of injury on the remainder of the ceramic block!
The remaining portion of the ceramic block may have sharp edges
(e.g. A) that could injury you if it is not removed carefully.
Always grasp the remainder of the ceramic block by its metal holder.
7.3.1
Milling of zirconia and aluminum oxide
In addition to the VITA In-Ceram ALUMINA, SPINELL and ZIRCONIA
materials, yttrium-reinforced zirconia and aluminum oxide is also available for the fabrication of crown and bridge frameworks as well as inner ceramic telescopes.
● Sirona inCoris ZI
● Sirona inCoris AL
● VITA In-Ceram YZ CUBES
● VITA In-Ceram AL CUBES
● IVOCLAR VIVADENT IPS e.max ZirCAD
CAUTION
Large blocks in CEREC 3 milling units
Blocks that are larger than 28mm may only be used in inLab, inLab MC
XL, CEREC MC XL and CEREC 3 milling units with the serial number
5000 and higher.
CAUTION
Flip blocks
"Flip blocks" (with two holders) may only be used in inLab and CEREC
3 milling units with the serial number 5000 and higher.
"Flip blocks" may not be used in inLab MC XL or CEREC MC XL!
The restorations are milled with an oversize of approx. 25% (aluminum
oxide approx. 18% larger) and shrunk subsequently to the exact fitting final contour in a sintering process. The exact shrinkage data of the respective block are stored in a barcode on the block itself, which is
automatically read prior to the milling process.
152
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Milling
Operator's manual
NOTICE
Bar code not detected
If the scanner has been unable to read the bar code, you must enter the
8-digit character string (e.g.*1234XYZ) which is printed on the block manually in the dialog box.
7.4 Stack milling with inLab (or CEREC 3 milling unit)
Several restorations can be milled from a single large block. Proceed as
follows:
1. Have several preparations to be processed via stack milling scanned.
NOTICE
Large model holder
This can also be done in a single scanning operation on a large model
holder for bridge framework.
2. Design the first restoration.
Selecting a block for stack milling
3. Select a block "… Stack" in the "Select block" dialog box and start the
milling process.
4. Start a new inLab 3D program.
5. Load and design the second restoration.
6. Click the "Mill" icon.
NOTICE
Number of queued applications
The number of queued applications is limited only by the amount of storage space available (on the PC and graphics card).
If a restoration no longer fits into the remaining block, the corresponding
milling operation will not be started.
CAUTION
Damage to VITA YZ
With VITA YZ, breakage may occur following tapping in rare cases.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
153
Milling
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Milling test pieces
Operator's manual
CAUTION
Damage to VITA In-Ceram and VITA YZ
With VITA In-Ceram and VITA YZ, the work may be destroyed in rare
cases if it comes under the gearing while the next restoration is being
milled
7.5 Milling test pieces
You can use the 3D software to mill test pieces, e.g. in order to produce
ceramic color samples.
When you load a test piece, it is not displayed in the 3D viewer.
inLab
Milling a test piece costs one unit, if no AK Unlimited Softguard dongle is
installed in inLab3D.
7.6 Milling a flip block
7.6.1
Prerequisite
To be able to process the flip block, the following must be ensured:
● An inLab gearhead must be installed,
● "inLab gearhead installed" must be checked (see "inLab gearhead installed" [ ➙ 82]).
CAUTION
Flip blocks
"Flip blocks" (with two holders) may only be used in inLab and CEREC
3 milling units with the serial number 5000 and higher.
"Flip blocks" may not be used in inLab MC XL or CEREC MC XL!
7.6.2
Performing the milling process
1. Choose a flip block from the block selection and mount it in the milling
unit.
2. If it cannot be read correctly, enter it manually.
3. When prompted by the software, unscrew the setscrew quite a bit and
remove the partially milled block carefully from the milling unit.
4. Cut off the rest of the block at the partially milled end manually.
5. Re-insert the partially milled block into the milling unit and continue
the milling process.
154
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Milling
Operator's manual
7.7 Fast grinding
Block selection
CAUTION
Loss of quality!
Fast grinding may have a negative influence on the quality of the restoration!
If desired, the grinding process can be accelerated for some materials. To
do this, simply set a check mark in the corresponding checkbox of the
block selection dialog box.
This mode is faster, however the surface of the milled restoration is slightly rougher.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
155
Managing/archiving data
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Saving regularly
Operator's manual
8
Managing/archiving data
8.1 Saving regularly
To create an archive of all finished restorations you should save regularly.
Under "Settings"/"Configuration"/"Save", you can activate or deactivate
the "Connect database" option (see "Save" in the "Configuration" chapter
[ ➙ 84]).
8.2 Connect database
If a SIRONA database is installed in your system, it can be used for data
archiving and patient management after selecting this option. Once the
database has been connected, all patients stored in the database are
known to the application. You must enter new patient names in the database. Restorations must also be saved and loaded using the database.
If the database connection is used, all inLab restorations will be saved to
the "CEREC" subfolder in the Pdata folder of the database. This folder is
usually located on a server which can be accessed from all PCs connected to the network.
inLab images are assigned the image code VC in the SIRONA database.
8.3 Database import
After the database connection is activated, all locally saved patients and
restorations are transferred (imported) to the SIRONA database. A message indicating the successful database import is then displayed.
Patients (and their restorations) cannot be imported to the SIRONA database if they are identified only by a card index number in the local data
structure. A message informs the user about this situation during database import.
8.4 Database export
When the database connection is deactivated, a dialog box appears in
which you can select whether the restorations stored in the database are
to be copied (exported) to the local data structure.
The patient information will in any case be transferred by creating a patient folder in the data structure for each patient in the database. During database export, you are informed of its progress.
A message indicating the successful database export is then displayed.
156
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Managing/archiving data
Operator's manual
8.5 Restoration files
In the "Programs"/"CEREC"/"Data" directory (if you have installed the
program under "Programs"/"CEREC"), you will find a subfolder for and
named after each patient. Each patient folder contains one or more tooth
folders in which the individual restoration files are stored.
If the database connection is used, the "PDATA" folder (created during installation of the SIRONA database) contains a folder named "CEREC".
Since a unique patient number is assigned to each patient in the database, no patient names are used here under "CEREC"; instead, consecutively numbered folders (e.g. “P_000001”) are listed. The tooth folders
and restoration files can be found below them.
8.6 Consistency check
If the database connection is active, a consistency check will be performed when the inLab 3D application is started. The database will be searched for images from earlier inLab 3D versions. Any such old images
found will be updated. The user is informed of the progress.
If the list of restorations for a specific patient is displayed for loading or
deletion, corrupt restoration files will automatically be recognized and
suggested for deletion.
This mechanism always remains active, regardless of whether a database is connected or not.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
157
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
General information
Operator's manual
9
Restoration types and design techniques
9.1 General information
In the "New" dialog, first select the following:
● "Restoration"
● "Bite registration technique"
● "Design technique"
On the virtual model, then select the tooth positions that you want to design.
Different design techniques are available depending on which restoration
type you choose. For example, a restoration for an implant can be designed using the design technique "Mesostructure" or "Biogeneric".
You can use "Bite registration technique" to select how the antagonist for
the relevant jaw is moved to the centric jaw relation. The upper and lower
jaws can usually be brought together using one buccal exposure. If you
want to work with a conventional bite register, select "Bite material scan".
9.2 Choosing an appropriate design technique
empty
Biogeneric (Inlay, veneer, crown, bridge, implant)
Description: Biogeneric
Select this design technique to generate a fully anatomical suggestion
that is calculated from the neighboring teeth using the patented "Biogeneric" procedure.
Also refer to the information provided under "Biogeneric [ ➙ 163]“.
empty
FrameWork (Crown/bridge)
Select this design technique to create frameworks or primary sections without taking the antagonist information into account. These frameworks
are then not automatically suggested to support cusps.
Also refer to the information provided under "FrameWork [ ➙ 186]“.
empty
Biogeneric reference (Inlay, veneer, crown, bridge)
Description: Replication
Select this design technique to generate a fully anatomical suggestion
that is calculated from any tooth using the patented "Biogeneric" procedure.
Also refer to the information provided under "Biogeneric reference [ ➙
192]“.
empty
Correlation (Inlay, veneer, crown, bridge)
Description: Correlation
Select this design technique to transfer parts of an existing occlusal surface to the restoration and enhance the rest using the patented Biogeneric procedure.
Also refer to the information provided under "Correlation [ ➙ 193]“.
158
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
empty
WaxUp
Also refer to the information provided under "WaxUp [ ➙ 209]“.
empty
Mesostructure (Implant)
Select this design technique to design an abutment without consideration
of the antagonist or the restoration based on it.
Also refer to the information provided under "Mesostructure design technique [ ➙ 215]“.
empty
MCXL Model (Model)
This option is automatically selected if restoration type "Model" has been
chosen. A model can hereby be prepared for milling on the inLab MC XL.
Also refer to the information provided under Milling models [ ➙ 237].
CAUTION when using milling cutters
NOTICE
Make sure the correct tools are used
Specific tools (milling cutters) are required for milling the models on the
inLab MC XL. The milling cutters will be used as follows:
Set 1: Finisher 10
Set 2: Shaper 25
➢ Do not use the milling instruments for restorations in order to produce models.
CAUTION when using milling cutters
NOTICE
Make sure the milling cutters are used correctly
If the milling cutters are not used as described below, this may cause damage to the milling unit.
➢ Use the Shaper 25 and Finisher 10 milling cutters only in inLab MC
XL milling units, as of serial number 120 000 or in inLab XL milling
units that have been upgraded using the motor upgrade kit for inLab
(REF 6338631).
➢ Use the Shaper 25 and Finisher 10 milling cutters only for manufacturing models from the inCoris S model (REF 6299361) and inCoris
L model blocks (REF 6299379).
empty
Articulation
Description: Articulation
Use this design technique if you want to consider information from a dynamic bite register.
Also refer to the information provided under "Articulation design example
[ ➙ 181]“.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
159
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Overview of restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
empty
Reduced (Crown/bridge)
Select this design technique to create frameworks or anatomically reduced shapes. Reduction from the biogenerically calculated fully anatomical
shape allows you to create defined space for a homogeneous veneering
layer with ideal cusp support.
Also refer to the information provided under "Reduced [ ➙ 229]“.
empty
Multilayer (Crown/bridge)
This design technique corresponds to the Biogeneric procedure. However, the fully anatomical shape is broken down into a framework with no
undercut and the covering layer. The two parts can be milled from different materials.
Do not use this design technique if you want to manually veneer a framework. The design technique "Reduced" is suitable for this purpose.
Also refer to the information provided under "Multilayer [ ➙ 234]“.
9.3 Overview of restoration types and design
techniques
Deactivate Complete New dialog
New dialog box (default)
160
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
NOTICE
Hiding the Complete New dialog box
If you do not wish to have all restorations and design techniques displayed, you can remove the check mark next to "Complete New dialog"
under "Settings"/"Configuration"/"Options" (see "Options" in the "Configuration" chapter [ ➙ 85]). In this case, the New dialog box will appear
as shown in the figure below.
Graphics: New dialog box
New Screen
The following
In the New dialog box, you can select the following and confirm with "OK":
List of inLab restorations
● "Restoration"
–
"Inlay, Onlay, Partial crown"
–
"Crown"
–
"Veneer"
–
"Bridge"
–
"Implant"
–
"Model"
Note on crown
NOTICE
Preparation margin too high
If the preparation margin of the crown (partial) is so high that it cuts the
proximal contact line of the crown suggestion, the system will automatically switch from crown to inlay.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
161
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Overview of restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
List of inLab design techniques
● "Design technique"
–
"Biogeneric"
–
"FrameWork"
–
"Biogeneric reference"
–
"Correlation"
–
"WaxUp"
–
"MCXL Model"
–
"Mesostructure"
–
"Articulation"
–
"Reduced"
–
"Multilayer"
● Element
Element listing
–
A: Crown,
shown in dark blue in the odontogram
–
B: Pontic,
shown in light blue in the odontogram
–
C: Partially edentulous (missing),
shown in brown in the odontogram
Odontogram
Selectable teeth are shown in white and non-selectable (inactive) teeth
are shown in yellow in the odontogram.
Elements
If you select "Bridge" as the restoration, the "Element" button group is visible. You can mark an element (e.g. A: crown) and then select a tooth
here. To mark another element, just click the corresponding button (e.g.
B: pontic).
Bridge elements selected
You can deactivate a selected tooth by clicking this tooth with the right
mouse button.
The "OK" button is enabled if:
162
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
● a single, consecutive row of buttons is pressed in the odontogram,
and
● at least one of the teeth in the row is marked as a crown.
9.4 Biogeneric
9.4.1
Introduction
In the "Biogeneric"/"Individual" design technique, the neighboring teeth
are analyzed and the restoration suggestion is calculated on this basis.
The more information that is available, the more successful the calculation. A full image of at least one neighboring tooth should therefore be taken from the occlusal/incisal direction. For anterior and corner teeth, an
image of the labial surface should also be taken.
For premolars or molars, the calculation is mainly based on the distal
neighbor, for anterior teeth the mesial neighbor is used.
NOTICE
If larger regions of the neighboring teeth already have restorations or
are prepared, this calculation is severely restricted. A suggestion is also
generated, which corresponds, however, to an average tooth that has
not been optimally adapted to the residual teeth. If a suitable neighbor
cannot be obtained, a preferential tooth shape should be selected
("adult", "youth", "lepto", "athlet", "pykno" or "asia") or the "Biogeneric reference" design technique should be chosen.
9.4.2
Design example of MOD inlay with lingual extension for
tooth 27
MOD = Mesio-occluso-distal
9.4.2.1
Creating a new restoration
✔ You have selected a patient from the database or created a new paInstructions
tient.
1. Select the following options in the New dialog box.
2. Click on "OK".
ª The arrow cursor jumps automatically to the button marked "Acquire preparation".
Preparations
27 - Inlay, Onlay, Partial crown - dental database - inLab
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
Range
Value
"Restoration"
"Inlay, Onlay, Partial crown"
"Design technique"
"Biogeneric"
Tooth
27
163
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Biogeneric
Operator's manual
9.4.2.2
Acquiring the preparation
1. Acquire the preparation (see "Optical impression").
2. If all of the required optical impressions are available, click the button
marked "Next".
ª The 3D representation of the preparation is reconstructed and then
displayed in the 3D viewer.
9.4.2.3
Displaying the 3D representation
MOD inlay with lingual extension for tooth 27 inLab/CEREC
3D display
Rotating the preparation
You can rotate the preparation as required by pressing and holding down
the left mouse button and moving the mouse in the desired direction.
Arrows in the view window
You can also use the cursor arrows in the "View" window to view the preparation from the desired direction (see "Standard views" [ ➙ 29]).
9.4.2.4
Hiding image regions
MOD inlay with lingual extension for tooth 27 inLab/CEREC
Drawing the trimming line
1. Cut the distal and mesial neighbors away by entering an open line for
each of them (see "Trimming the preparation [ ➙ 131]“).
Instructions
164
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
2. Click the "Next" button.
9.4.2.5
Entering the preparation margin
MOD inlay with lingual extension for tooth 27 inLab/CEREC
Entering and checking the preparation margin
1. Enter the preparation margin (see "Entering the preparation margin"
[ ➙ 135]) and check it by rotating the preparation.
Instructions
NOTICE
Directly editing the preparation margin
The preparation margin can be edited immediately after it is entered
(see Editing tool (Edit) [ ➙ 38]).
2. Click the "Next" button.
ª A selection menu appears in which the type of tooth shape can
be selected.
3. Select "Individual" for biogeneric calculation based on the neighboring teeth.
or
➢ If no suitable neighboring teeth are available, select a preferential
tooth shape: "adult", "youth", "lepto", "athlet", "pykno" or "asia".
4. Confirm your choice by clicking the "OK" button.
ª The restoration is calculated and then displayed.
9.4.2.6
Editing the restoration
1. Assess the restoration from all directions.
2. Hide the neighboring teeth by clicking the "Trim" button.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
165
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Biogeneric
Operator's manual
3. If required, click the button marked "Edit". You can change all construction lines as required (see "Editing tool (Edit)" [ ➙ 38]).
4. Activate the contact surfaces by clicking the "Contact" button (see
"Showing/hiding the contact to the neighboring tooth (Contact)" [ ➙
31]).
5. As required adapt the contact surfaces using the "Form" tool (see
"Form tool (Form)" [ ➙ 42]).
Changing the contact surfaces
6. After the design is finished, click the icon marked "Next".
Using the "Form" tool, you can apply and smooth additional material.
Parts of the occlusal surface, the proximal surfaces, or the marginal situations can thus be changed as required.
Applying and smoothing material
166
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
9.4.2.7
Examining the milling preview
MOD inlay with lingual extension for tooth 27 inLab/CEREC
Milling preview
Instructions
The finished restoration is displayed in the milling preview (see ".Milling
Preview [ ➙ 145]“).
1. Inspect the restoration.
2. Select the desired milling mode.
3. Set the sprue location on a flat, convexly curved side.
9.4.2.8
Milling
Note on inEos
NOTICE
For inEos Blue
You can only perform this step with inEos Blue if a milling unit is available.
1. If you are satisfied with the restoration, click the "Mill" icon (see "Mill"
[ ➙ 144]).
Instructions
2. Start the milling process (see also Operating Instructions of the milling unit).
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
167
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Biogeneric
Operator's manual
9.4.3
Design example for MOD inlay with antagonist image on
tooth 16
MOD = Mesio-occluso-distal
9.4.3.1
Creating a new restoration
✔ You have selected a patient from the database or created a new paInstructions
tient.
1. Select the following options in the New dialog box.
2. Click on "OK".
ª The arrow cursor jumps automatically to the button marked "Acquire preparation".
Preparations
16 - Inlay, Onlay, Partial crown - dental database - inLab
9.4.3.2
Range
Value
"Restoration"
"Inlay, Onlay, Partial crown"
"Design technique"
"Biogeneric"
Tooth
16
Acquiring an optical impression of the antagonist and the preparation
1. Have the antagonist and then the preparation scanned (see "Optical
impression").
2. If all of the required optical impressions are available, click the button
marked "Next".
ª The 3D representation of the preparation is reconstructed and then
displayed in the 3D viewer.
9.4.3.3
Displaying the 3D representation
inLab MOD inlay with antagonist image for tooth 16
3D display
Rotating the preparation
You can rotate the preparation as required by pressing and holding down
the left mouse button and moving the mouse in the desired direction.
168
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
Arrows in the view window
You can also use the cursor arrows in the "View" window to view the preparation from the desired direction (see "Standard views" [ ➙ 29]).
9.4.3.4
Hiding image regions
MOD inlay with antagonist image for tooth 16 inLab/CEREC
Drawing the trimming line
1. Cut the distal and mesial neighbors away by entering an open line for
each of them (see "Trimming the preparation [ ➙ 131]“).
Instructions
2. Click the "Next" button.
9.4.3.5
Trimming the antagonist
MOD inlay with antagonist image for tooth 16 inLab/CEREC
Trimming the antagonist
1. Trim the antagonist (see "Trimming the antagonist" [ ➙ 132]).
Instructions
2. Click the button "Next".
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
169
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Biogeneric
Operator's manual
9.4.3.6
Entering the preparation margin
inLab/CEREC MOD inlay with antagonist image for tooth 16
Entering and checking the preparation margin
1. Enter the preparation margin (see "Entering the preparation margin"
[ ➙ 135]) and check it by rotating the preparation.
Instructions
NOTICE
Directly editing the preparation margin
The preparation margin can be edited immediately after it is entered
(see Editing tool (Edit) [ ➙ 38]).
2. Click the "Next" button.
ª A selection menu appears in which the type of tooth shape can
be selected.
3. Select "Individual" for biogeneric calculation based on the neighboring teeth.
or
➢ If no suitable neighboring teeth are available, select a preferential
tooth shape: "adult", "youth", "lepto", "athlet", "pykno" or "asia".
4. Confirm your choice by clicking the "OK" button.
ª The restoration is calculated and then displayed.
170
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
9.4.3.7
Making a proximal contact
MOD inlay with antagonist image for tooth 16 inLab/CEREC
Changing the contact surfaces
1. Activate the contact surfaces by clicking the "Contact" button (see
"Showing/hiding the contact to the neighboring tooth (Contact)" [ ➙
31]).
2. If red penetration areas are present, they can be eliminated using the
"Design" tools (see "Design window" [ ➙ 37]).
3. After the design is finished, click the icon marked "Next".
9.4.3.8
Examining the milling preview
MOD inlay with antagonist image for tooth 16 inLab/CEREC
Milling preview
Instructions
The finished restoration is displayed in the milling preview (see ".Milling
Preview [ ➙ 145]“).
1. Inspect the restoration.
2. Select the desired milling mode.
3. Set the sprue location on a flat, convexly curved side.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
171
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Biogeneric
Operator's manual
9.4.3.9
Milling
Note on inEos
NOTICE
For inEos Blue
You can only perform this step with inEos Blue if a milling unit is available.
1. If you are satisfied with the restoration, click the "Mill" icon (see "Mill"
[ ➙ 144]).
Instructions
2. Start the milling process (see also Operating Instructions of the milling unit).
9.4.4
9.4.4.1
Design example of partial crown with antagonist image for
tooth 17
Creating a new restoration
✔ You have selected a patient from the database or created a new paInstructions
tient.
1. Select the following options in the New dialog box.
2. Click on "OK".
ª The arrow cursor jumps automatically to the button marked "Acquire preparation".
Preparations
17 - Inlay, Onlay, Partial crown - dental database - inLab
9.4.4.2
Range
Value
"Restoration"
"Inlay, Onlay, Partial crown"
"Design technique"
"Biogeneric"
Tooth
17
Acquiring an optical impression of the antagonist and the preparation
1. Have the antagonist and then the preparation scanned (see "Optical
impression").
2. If all of the required optical impressions are available, click the button
marked "Next".
ª The 3D representation of the preparation is reconstructed and then
displayed in the 3D viewer.
172
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
9.4.4.3
Displaying the 3D representation
inLab/CEREC partial crown with antagonist image for tooth 17
3D display
Rotating the preparation
You can rotate the preparation as required by pressing and holding down
the left mouse button and moving the mouse in the desired direction.
Arrows in the view window
You can also use the cursor arrows in the "View" window to view the preparation from the desired direction (see "Standard views" [ ➙ 29]).
9.4.4.4
Hiding image regions
Drawing the trimming line
1. Cut away the mesial neighbor by entering an open line (see ".Trimming the preparation [ ➙ 131]“).
2. Click the "Next" button.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
173
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Biogeneric
Operator's manual
9.4.4.5
Trimming the antagonist
Partial crown with antagonist image for tooth 17
Trimming the antagonist
1. Trim the antagonist (see "Trimming the antagonist" [ ➙ 132]).
Instructions
2. Click the button "Next".
9.4.4.6
Entering the preparation margin
inLab/CEREC partial crown with antagonist image for tooth 17
Entering and checking the preparation margin
1. Enter the preparation margin (see "Entering the preparation margin"
[ ➙ 135]) and check it by rotating the preparation.
Instructions
174
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
NOTICE
Directly editing the preparation margin
The preparation margin can be edited immediately after it is entered
(see Editing tool (Edit) [ ➙ 38]).
2. Click the "Next" button.
ª A selection menu appears in which the type of tooth shape can
be selected.
3. Select "Individual" for biogeneric calculation based on the neighboring teeth.
or
➢ If no suitable neighboring teeth are available, select a preferential
tooth shape: "adult", "youth", "lepto", "athlet", "pykno" or "asia".
4. Confirm your choice by clicking the "OK" button.
ª The restoration is calculated and then displayed.
inLab/CEREC partial crown with antagonist image for tooth 17
Restoration
empty
Penetration areas
Penetration areas
1. If red penetration areas are present, they can be eliminated using the
"Design" tools.
2. After the design is finished, click the "Next" icon.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
175
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Biogeneric
Operator's manual
9.4.4.7
Examining the milling preview
inLab/CEREC partial crown with antagonist image for tooth 17
Milling simulation
Instructions
The finished restoration is displayed in the milling preview (see ".Milling
Preview [ ➙ 145]“).
1. Inspect the restoration.
2. Select the desired milling mode.
3. Set the sprue location on a flat, convexly curved side.
9.4.4.8
Milling
Note on inEos
NOTICE
For inEos Blue
You can only perform this step with inEos Blue if a milling unit is available.
1. If you are satisfied with the restoration, click the "Mill" icon (see "Mill"
[ ➙ 144]).
Instructions
2. Start the milling process (see also Operating Instructions of the milling unit).
176
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
9.4.5
9.4.5.1
Design example of crown with antagonist image for tooth
47
Creating a new restoration
✔ You have selected a patient from the database or created a new paInstructions
tient.
1. Select the following options in the New dialog box.
2. Click on "OK".
ª The arrow cursor jumps automatically to the button marked "Acquire preparation".
Preparations
47 - crown - dental database - inLab
9.4.5.2
Range
Value
"Restoration"
"Crown"
"Design technique"
"Biogeneric"
Tooth
47
Acquiring an optical impression of the antagonist and the preparation
1. Have the antagonist and then the preparation scanned (see "Optical
impression").
2. If all of the required optical impressions are available, click the button
marked "Next".
ª The 3D representation of the preparation is reconstructed and then
displayed in the 3D viewer.
9.4.5.3
Displaying the 3D representation
inLab/CEREC crown with antagonist image for tooth 47
3D display
Rotating the preparation
You can rotate the preparation as required by pressing and holding down
the left mouse button and moving the mouse in the desired direction.
Arrows in the view window
You can also use the cursor arrows in the "View" window to view the preparation from the desired direction (see "Standard views" [ ➙ 29]).
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
177
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Biogeneric
Operator's manual
9.4.5.4
Hiding image regions
inLab/CEREC crown with antagonist image for tooth 47
Drawing the trimming line
1. Cut the distal and mesial neighbors away by entering an open line for
each of them (see "Trimming the preparation [ ➙ 131]“).
Instructions
2. Click the "Next" button.
9.4.5.5
Trimming the antagonist
inLab/CEREC crown with antagonist image for tooth 47
Trimming the antagonist
1. Trim the antagonist (see "Trimming the antagonist" [ ➙ 132]).
Instructions
2. Click the button "Next".
9.4.5.6
Entering the preparation margin
Crown with antagonist image for tooth 47 inLab/CEREC
Preparation margin
178
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
1. Enter the preparation margin (see "Entering the preparation margin"
[ ➙ 135]) and check it by rotating the preparation.
Instructions
NOTICE
Directly editing the preparation margin
The preparation margin can be edited immediately after it is entered
(see Editing tool (Edit) [ ➙ 38]).
2. Click the "Next" button.
ª A selection menu appears in which the type of tooth shape can
be selected.
3. Select "Individual" for biogeneric calculation based on the neighboring teeth.
or
➢ If no suitable neighboring teeth are available, select a preferential
tooth shape: "adult", "youth", "lepto", "athlet", "pykno" or "asia".
4. Confirm your choice by clicking the "OK" button.
ª The restoration is calculated and then displayed.
empty
Penetration areas
Penetration areas
1. If red penetration areas are present, they can be eliminated using the
"Design" tools.
2. After the design is finished, click the "Next" icon.
9.4.5.7
Performing the design
✔ A biogeneric suggestion is calculated automatically. This process can
take several minutes, depending on the hardware configuration.
1. You can use the "Position" and "Rotate" tools to align the restoration
as required.
2. Using the "Design" tools "Scale", "Edit", "Shape", "Form", and "Drop",
you can modify the restoration until it fits perfectly into the overall environment.
3. You can use the "Antagonist" button to display the "Antagonist" window (see "Show/hide antagonist [ ➙ 33]") and with the aid of the "Design" tools, you can adapt the occlusal surface to the antagonist.
4. After the design is finished, click on the "Next" button.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
179
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Biogeneric
Operator's manual
9.4.5.8
Examining the milling preview
inLab/CEREC crown with antagonist image for tooth 47
Milling simulation
Instructions
The finished restoration is displayed in the milling preview (see ".Milling
Preview [ ➙ 145]“).
1. Inspect the restoration.
2. Select the desired milling mode.
3. Set the sprue location on a flat, convexly curved side.
9.4.5.9
Milling
Note on inEos
NOTICE
For inEos Blue
You can only perform this step with inEos Blue if a milling unit is available.
1. If you are satisfied with the restoration, click the "Mill" icon (see "Mill"
[ ➙ 144]).
Instructions
2. Start the milling process (see also Operating Instructions of the milling unit).
180
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
9.4.6
9.4.6.1
Articulation design example
Creating a new restoration
✔ You have selected a patient from the database or created a new paInstructions
tient.
1. Select the following options in the New dialog box.
2. Click on "OK".
ª The arrow cursor jumps automatically to the button marked "Acquire preparation".
Preparations
Crown - articulation - ?? - CEREC/inLab
9.4.6.2
Range
Value
"Restoration"
"Crown"
"Design technique"
"Articulation"
Tooth
??
Acquiring the preparation
➢ Acquire the preparation (see "Optical impression").
9.4.6.3
Acquiring the antagonist
➢ Acquire the antagonist (static impression).
9.4.6.4
Acquiring the dynamic occlusion impression
1. Acquire the dynamic occlusion impression (FGP, Functionally Generated Path).
2. If all of the required optical impressions are available, click the icon
marked "Next".
ª The 3D representation of the preparation is reconstructed and then
displayed in the 3D viewer.
9.4.6.5
Hiding image regions
1. Cut the distal and mesial neighbors away by entering an open line for
each of them (see "Trimming the preparation [ ➙ 131]“).
Instructions
2. Click the "Next" button.
9.4.6.6
Trimming the antagonist
1. Cut away the regions which do not belong to the occlusion of the opposite tooth.
2. Click the button "Next".
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
181
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Biogeneric
Operator's manual
9.4.6.7
Entering the preparation margin
1. Enter the preparation margin (see "Entering the preparation margin"
[ ➙ 135]) and check it by rotating the preparation.
Instructions
NOTICE
Directly editing the preparation margin
The preparation margin can be edited immediately after it is entered
(see Editing tool (Edit) [ ➙ 38]).
2. Click the "Next" button.
ª A selection menu appears in which the type of tooth shape can
be selected.
3. Select "Individual" for biogeneric calculation based on the neighboring teeth.
or
➢ If no suitable neighboring teeth are available, select a preferential
tooth shape: "adult", "youth", "lepto", "athlet", "pykno" or "asia".
4. Confirm your choice by clicking the "OK" button.
ª The restoration is calculated and then displayed.
9.4.6.8
Performing the design
✔ A biogeneric suggestion is calculated automatically. This process can
take several minutes, depending on the hardware configuration.
1. You can now modify the crown with all of the available tools ("Scale",
"Edit", "Shape", "Form", "Drop", …) and adapt it to the statics.
2. If you click the "Articulation" button, the 3D model of the dynamic occlusion impression is displayed and an additional dialog box is opened with the "Fit Restoration" button.
3. If you click the "Fit Restoration" button, all of the interfering contacts
of the restoration which "protrude out of" the FGP will be ground virtually so that they disappear.
4. After the design is finished, click on the "Next" button.
9.4.6.9
Examining the milling preview
Instructions
The finished restoration is displayed in the milling preview (see ".Milling
Preview [ ➙ 145]“).
1. Inspect the restoration.
2. Select the desired milling mode.
3. Set the sprue location on a flat, convexly curved side.
9.4.6.10
Milling
Note on inEos
NOTICE
For inEos Blue
You can only perform this step with inEos Blue if a milling unit is available.
182
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
1. If you are satisfied with the restoration, click the "Mill" icon (see "Mill"
[ ➙ 144]).
Instructions
2. Start the milling process (see also Operating Instructions of the milling unit).
9.4.7
9.4.7.1
Veneer design example for tooth 21
Creating a new restoration
✔ You have selected a patient from the database or created a new paInstructions
tient.
1. Select the following options in the New dialog box.
2. Click on "OK".
ª The arrow cursor jumps automatically to the button marked "Acquire preparation".
Preparations
Veneer - dental database - 21 - CEREC/inLab
9.4.7.2
Range
Value
"Restoration"
"Veneer"
"Design technique"
"Biogeneric reference"
Tooth
21
Acquiring the preparation
1. Acquire an image of the preparation from the incisal/occlusal direction.
2. If all of the required optical impressions are available, click the "Next"
button.
ª The 3D representation of the preparation is reconstructed and
then displayed in the 3D viewer.
9.4.7.3
Trimming the model and drawing the preparation margin
Graphics
Drawing the preparation margin
1. Trim the model (if necessary).
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
183
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Biogeneric
Operator's manual
2. Enter the preparation margin (see "Entering the preparation margin"
[ ➙ 135]).
3. Click the button "Next".
ª The restoration is calculated and then displayed.
9.4.7.4
Performing the design
1. You can use the "Position" and "Rotate" tools to align the restoration.
2. Use the Edit tool to redraw the shell into the correct size and shape.
3. Use the Smooth tool (wax drop function) to smoothen the transition
from the margin to the shell proposal. Avoid moving the Smooth tool
over the surface of the veneer as it will flatten the texture which has
been created.
NOTICE
Wax drops for small amounts of material
If you have to add small amounts of material in this region, the small
drops should be your first choice.
4. After the design is finished, click on the "Next" button.
9.4.7.5
Examining the milling preview
Veneer tooth 21 inLab/CEREC
Milling Preview
The finished restoration is displayed in the milling preview (see ".Milling
Preview [ ➙ 145]“).
Note on TriLuxe block
NOTICE
Multicolor block
Positioning of the restoration in a multicolored block and the position of
the sprue location with the use of multicolored blocks is described under
"Positioning the restoration in a multicolored block [ ➙ 148]".
184
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
1. Inspect the restoration.
2. Select the desired milling mode.
9.4.7.6
Milling
Note on inEos
NOTICE
For inEos Blue
You can only perform this step with inEos Blue if a milling unit is available.
1. If you are satisfied with the restoration, click the "Mill" icon (see "Mill"
[ ➙ 144]).
Instructions
2. Start the milling process (see also Operating Instructions of the milling unit).
9.4.8
Bridge Biogeneric design technique
In the New dialog box, for "Bridge" restorations, you can select the design
technique "Biogeneric".
You can mark the bridge configuration in the New dialog box as usual.
Then you can enter the preparation margins and base lines from the distal
in the mesial direction as for a bridge framework.
Once the last line has been entered, it is possible to edit all lines.
After determining the direction of insertion, a biogeneric suggestion is calculated.
All of the tools required to modify the suggestion are now available to you.
If you have scanned an antagonist, the occlusion can also be adapted automatically (as for a single anatomical crown).
The design of the crown does not yet have to be definite at this time; it
can be corrected at any time until shortly before the milling preview. For
this purpose, a double-click on an unselected crown is sufficient to enable
its subsequent adaptation.
As soon as you are satisfied with the design of the bridge, you can click
the green "Next" arrow to change to the milling preview, where the freeforming tools "Form", "Drop" and "Shape" are available for the final finer
details.
CAUTION
No connectors between crowns
The user himself is responsible for the coherence of the bridge! Do NOT
place any connectors between the crowns!
When using the "Cut" tool, the cut surface is displayed in the status bar.
This allows you to verify the thickness of the connection surfaces.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
185
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
FrameWork
Operator's manual
9.5 FrameWork
9.5.1
9.5.1.1
Designing a crown framework
Creating a new restoration
✔ You have selected a patient from the database or created a new paInstructions
tient.
1. Select the following options in the New dialog box.
2. Click on "OK".
ª The arrow cursor jumps automatically to the button marked "Acquire preparation".
Preparations
Crown - FrameWork - 16
9.5.1.2
empty
Range
Value
"Restoration"
"Crown"
"Design technique"
"FrameWork"
Tooth
16
Acquiring the preparation
Note on inEos Blue rotation
inEos Blue
NOTICE
Rotational scan
For details on fastening the preparation in the model holder and performing a rotational scan, please refer to the inEos Blue operating instructions, chapter on "3D image acquisition".
186
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
empty
inLab
inLab
1. Mount the model of the preparation on a model holder for bridge framework or on a model holder for crown framework. The type of model
holder is automatically detected during scanning.
Instructions
inLab crown framework
2. Start the scanning process (see the Operating Instructions for inLab,
"Starting the scanning process").
NOTICE
Image group in the active region
After performing more than one scanning process, make sure that only
one image group is located in the active region of the image catalog before you confirm the optical impression (via the"Next" icon) (see "Image
catalog [ ➙ 117]“).
3. Click the "Next" button.
9.5.1.3
Hiding image regions
inLab crown framework
Drawing the trimming line
1. Cut away any unwanted regions by entering a closed line.
Instructions
2. Click the "Next" icon.
NOTICE
Rotating a view
You can rotate the view as you like in order to obtain a better perspective.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
187
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
FrameWork
Operator's manual
9.5.1.4
Examining the milling preview
inLab crown framework
Milling preview
Instructions
The finished restoration is displayed in the milling simulation.
1. Inspect the restoration.
2. If necessary, further corrections can be made to the outer surface of
the framework using the free-form tools "Drop" and "Shape" .
9.5.1.5
Milling a framework
empty
(inEos: only in conjunction with a milling unit)
1. If you are satisfied with the restoration, click the "Mill" icon.
2. Start the milling process (see also Operating Instructions of the milling unit).
9.5.2
9.5.2.1
Designing abridge framework
Orientation of bridges on the model holder
This chapter is only relevant if you use the scanner in the milling unit.
The positioning of the scan models on the L-shaped model holder influences the correctness of the labeling designating the sides in the 3D software.
If the procedure explained in the following is not observed, the designations on the 3D model will be incorrect, which can lead to faulty restoration
suggestions.
Following the scanning process, the model can be subsequently rotated
on screen with the "Design"/"Insertion axis" menu item (see "Correcting
the orientation of bridges" [ ➙ 140]).
188
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
Rule of thumb:
A
B
A
Clamping shank
B
mesial
C
distal
C
Mesial –> toward clamping shank A
For single-tooth models, this refers to the mesial side of the tooth to be
restored.
For bridge frameworks, a distinction must be made between several different cases:
● If a bridge only contains teeth from a single quadrant, the mesial side
of the bridge is unambiguous.
● If a bridge contains teeth from 2 quadrants, the "most distal" tooth (incl. partially edentulous) is moved in a "distal" direction (i.e. away from
the clamping shank). In this way, buccal and lingual designate the
correct side on the 3D model.
● If a bridge contains the same number of teeth from 2 quadrants, the
1st (3rd) quadrant is positioned in a mesial direction (i.e. towards the
clamping shank). In this way, buccal and lingual designate the correct
side on the 3D model.
9.5.2.2
Design example: 4-element bridge framework 43-46
1 abutment coping, 2 pontics, 1 abutment coping
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
189
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
FrameWork
Operator's manual
9.5.2.2.1
Creating a new restoration
✔ You have selected a patient from the database or created a new paInstructions
tient.
1. Select the following options in the New dialog box.
2. Click on "OK".
ª The arrow cursor jumps automatically to the button marked "Acquire preparation".
Preparations
Bridge FrameWork Element
Range
Value
"Restoration"
"Bridge"
"Design technique"
"FrameWork"
Element
9.5.2.2.2
empty
Acquiring the preparation
inLab
inLab
1. Mount the model of the preparation on a model holder for bridge framework or on a model holder for crown framework. The type of model
holder is automatically detected during scanning.
Instructions
inLab 4-element bridge framework 43-46
2. Start the scanning process (see the Operating Instructions for inLab,
"Starting the scanning process").
NOTICE
Image group in the active region
After performing more than one scanning process, make sure that only
one image group is located in the active region of the image catalog before you confirm the optical impression (via the"Next" icon) (see "Image
catalog [ ➙ 117]“).
3. Click the "Next" button.
9.5.2.2.3
Hiding image regions
inLab 4-element bridge framework
Drawing the trimming line
1. Cut away any unwanted regions by entering a closed line.
Instructions
2. Click the "Next" icon.
190
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
NOTICE
Rotating a view
You can rotate the view as you like in order to obtain a better perspective.
9.5.2.2.4
Entering the preparation margin
1. Enter the preparation margin of the first abutment coping (see "Entering preparation margins, base lines and the gingival line" [ ➙ 134]).
Entering and checking the preparation margin
2. Click the "Next" button.
3. Enter the base line of the first pontic and confirm with "Next".
4. Enter the base line of the second pontic and confirm with "Next".
5. Enter the preparation margin of the last abutment coping.
NOTICE
Preparation margin and base lines
You can check the preparation margin and the base lines by rotating the
model, and edit them as required (see "Editing tool (Edit) [ ➙ 38]“).
6. You can correct the insertion axis if necessary.
7. Click the "Next" button.
ª The restoration of the crown framework is calculated and then
displayed.
Restoration
8. You can use the "Scale" tool to change the abutment copings, connectors and pontics (see "Scaling tool (Scale)" [ ➙ 44]).
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
191
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Biogeneric reference
Operator's manual
9. You can use the "Position" and "Rotate" tools to modify the pontics
and connectors.
10. Click the "Next" button.
9.5.2.2.5
Examining the milling preview
inLab 4-element bridge framework
Milling simulation: bridge
Instructions
The finished restoration is displayed in the milling simulation.
1. Inspect the restoration.
2. If necessary, further corrections can be made to the outer surface of
the framework using the free-form tools "Drop" and "Shape" .
9.5.2.2.6
Milling a framework
empty
(inEos: only in conjunction with a milling unit)
1. If you are satisfied with the restoration, click the "Mill" icon.
2. Start the milling process (see also Operating Instructions of the milling unit).
9.6 Biogeneric reference
Biogeneric reference fragment
Select this design procedure if you wish to make a fully anatomic proposal, which is reconstructed from one of the reference teeth specified by
yourself by means of the patented biogeneric procedure. This reference
tooth must be acquired on a separate basis in the "Occlusion" image field.
This technique can be used for inlays, onlays, partial crowns, crowns, and
bridges.
✔ You have selected a patient from the database or created a new patient.
1. In the New dialog box, select "Biogeneric reference" as the design
procedure. The bite registration technology "Buccal scan" is not available to you.
2. As usual, take acquisitions of the preparation.
3. Take an optical impression of a reference tooth in the "Occlusion"
image field. The tooth is to be fully acquired from the occlusal direction.
4. Following the reconstruction of the model, you have the option to trim
the model as well as to determine the preparation line and insertion
axis.
5. You are subsequently prompted to enter the tooth position of the
tooth that you wish to use as the reference. Confirm your selection in
the tooth model by clicking the "OK" button.
192
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
6. If you selected the contralateral tooth as the reference, you can choose between creating the restoration by mirroring the contralateral
tooth or by means of biogeneric reconstruction.
7. The acquisition of the reference tooth is subsequently displayed in
gray. Double-click on the center of the occlusal surface, in the case
of anterior teeth click on the center of the incisal edge.
ª A biogeneric suggestion is now reconstructed.
8. You then have the option of adjusting and milling the suggestion with
standard tools.
9.7 Correlation
9.7.1
General information
empty
Optical impressions of the preparation and occlusion
Teeth in center of image
● The teeth to be restored should be located in the center of the image
in the mesio-distal and in the bucco-lingual direction.
Area coverage for preparation and occlusion impressions
● The preparation and occlusion impressions should cover an almost
equally large area.
Terminal situations
● Terminal situations are always distally terminal. The image of the
tooth to be restored (prepared tooth) must never be acquired so that
it lies on the mesial image border. Part of the neighboring tooth is always to be expected at the mesial end.
Scanning axis and position of model for inEos
● For inEos:
Make sure that the scanning axis and the position of the model are
not changed between the between the occlusal and the preparation
impressions. The image quadrants must be captured so that they are
coincident.
empty
Entering the preparation margin
Entering the preparation margin for Inlay, Onlay, Partial crown
If for"Inlay, Onlay, Partial crown" in the design technique "Correlation"
(and only in this design technique!), while drawing in the preparation margin, you set segment limits1 and if needed then change this, this will be
taken into account by the software (figure left).
If you set no segment limits, then (as previously in version 3.0x) the software automatically detects the segment limits (figure right).
1. Red balls for the transition from the bottom to the marginal area (double-click).
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
193
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Correlation
Operator's manual
Entering the preparation margin
9.7.2
Manual Correlation
If the models of the preparation, the occlusion and the antagonist cannot
be correlated, the following message appears.
Manual Correlation
If you want to perform manual correlation, click the Yes button.
Then mark at least 3 points on both models which are correlated
(A – A', B – B', C – C').
These points should form as large a triangle as possible (ABC or A'B'C').
194
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
NOTICE
Unambiguous point pairs
Additional points will not improve the result! The software can best calibrate the models with three unambiguous pairs of points.
1. Double-click a prominent location (e.g. A) in a model to set a colored
point.
2. Then double-click the corresponding location on the other model (e.g.
A').
NOTICE
Moving points
The colored points can be moved via drag and drop.
3. Set reference points B – B' and C – C' as described under items 1 – 2.
4. Click the button "Next".
9.7.3
9.7.3.1
Design example for tooth 16 with extensive fissure caries
and proximal caries on both sides
Creating a new restoration
✔ You have selected a patient from the database or created a new paInstructions
tient.
1. In the "New" dialog, select the information stated below.
2. Click "OK".
Tooth 16 with extensive fissure caries and proximal caries on both sides (Master/inLab)
9.7.3.2
Range
Value
"Restoration"
"Inlay, Onlay, Partial crown"
"Design technique"
"Correlation"
Tooth
16
Taking an occlusal impression
Observe central instruction / instructions inLab
NOTICE
Observe instructions
The occlusion of the tooth to be restored must be located in the center
of the image during the acquisition. Observe the instructions under "General information on the optical impression" [ ➙ 193].
Example for slightly impaired occlusal surface
In this example, an only slightly impaired occlusal surface was provisionally reconstructed and the contact situation was also checked.
An ideal "occlusal impression" is thus obtained for the subsequent correlation.
Without powdered working field
1. Move the arrow cursor to the "Acquire occlusion" icon.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
195
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Correlation
Operator's manual
2. Acquire the occlusion.
9.7.3.3
Acquiring the preparation
Graphics: tooth 16 with fissure caries and proximal caries, inLab/CEREC
Image field of the preparation
1. Accept the preparation (see "Optical impression" [ ➙ 94]).
inLab instructions
NOTICE
Observe instructions
The prepared tooth must be located in the center of the image during the
acquisition. Observe the instructions under "General information on the
optical impression" [ ➙ 193].
2. If all of the required optical impressions are available, click the button
marked "Next".
ª The 3D representation of the preparation is reconstructed and
then displayed in the 3D viewer.
196
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
Graphics: tooth 16 with fissure caries and proximal caries, inLab/CEREC
3D display
9.7.3.4
Hiding image regions
Tooth 16 with fissures - Correlation - inLab
Drawing the trimming line
1. Cut the distal and mesial neighbors away by entering an open line for
each of them (see "Trimming the preparation [ ➙ 131]“).
Instructions
2. Click the "Next" button.
9.7.3.5
Entering the preparation margin
1. Enter the preparation margin (see "Entering the preparation margin"
[ ➙ 135]) and check it by rotating the preparation.
Instructions
NOTICE
Directly editing the preparation margin
The preparation margin can be edited immediately after having been entered.
2. Click the button "Next".
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
197
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Correlation
Operator's manual
9.7.3.6
Adapting the copying line
Suggested copying line
✔ The program suggests a copying line (green line). The end points are
marked by red dots.
1. Move the red end points along the preparation margin, if necessary.
2. If required, adapt the copying line using the "Design" tool "Edit" (see
"Editing a design line" [ ➙ 39]).
3. After adapting the copying line, click the icon "Next".
ª The restoration is calculated and then displayed. All areas outside of
the copying line are generated by Biogenerics.
Restoration
9.7.3.7
Editing the restoration
1. Assess the restoration from all directions.
Instructions
2. Hide the neighboring teeth by clicking the "Trim" button.
3. Activate the contact surfaces by clicking the "Contact" button (see
"Showing/hiding the contact to the neighboring tooth (Contact)" [ ➙
31]).
4. As required adapt the contact surfaces using the "Design" tools.
198
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
Tooth 16 with fissure caries and proximal caries, inLab/CEREC
Extending contact surfaces
Insufficient contact
If the contact proves insufficient, you can extend the entire proximal surface with "Scale" tool (see "Scaling tool (Scale)" [ ➙ 44]).
Tooth 16 with fissure caries and proximal caries, inLab/CEREC
Contact too strong
If the contact is too strong, you can correct it with the "Form" tool (see
"Form tool (Form)" [ ➙ 42]).
➢ After the design is finished, click the icon marked "Next".
9.7.3.8
Examining the milling preview
Tooth 16 with fissures - Correlation - inLab
Milling simulation
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
199
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Correlation
Operator's manual
Instructions
The finished restoration is displayed in the milling preview (see ".Milling
Preview [ ➙ 145]“).
1. Inspect the restoration.
2. Select the desired milling mode.
3. Set the sprue location on a flat, convexly curved side.
9.7.3.9
Milling
Note on inEos
NOTICE
For inEos Blue
You can only perform this step with inEos Blue if a milling unit is available.
1. If you are satisfied with the restoration, click the "Mill" icon (see "Mill"
[ ➙ 144]).
Instructions
2. Start the milling process (see also Operating Instructions of the milling unit).
9.7.4
9.7.4.1
Design example of crown for tooth 26
Creating a new restoration
✔ You have selected a patient from the database or created a new paInstructions
tient.
1. In the "New" dialog, select the information stated below.
2. Click "OK".
Crown for tooth 26 (Master/inLab)
9.7.4.2
Range
Value
"Restoration"
"Crown"
"Design technique"
"Correlation"
Tooth
26
Taking an occlusal impression
Observe central instruction / instructions inLab
NOTICE
Observe instructions
The occlusion of the tooth to be restored must be located in the center
of the image during the acquisition. Observe the instructions under "General information on the optical impression" [ ➙ 193].
Prerequisite for reconstructing occlusal surface without powdered working field
1. Reconstruct the occlusal surface provisionally and check the contact
situation.
2. Move the arrow cursor to the "Acquire occlusion" icon.
3. Acquire the occlusion.
200
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
9.7.4.3
Acquiring the preparation
Scanner/3D camera/inEos
1. Accept the preparation (see "Optical impression" [ ➙ 94]).
inLab instructions
NOTICE
Observe instructions
The prepared tooth must be located in the center of the image during the
acquisition. Observe the instructions under "General information on the
optical impression" [ ➙ 193].
2. If all of the required optical impressions are available, click the button
marked "Next".
ª The 3D representation of the preparation is reconstructed and
then displayed in the 3D viewer.
Graphics: Crown for tooth 26, inLab/CEREC
3D display
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
201
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Correlation
Operator's manual
9.7.4.4
Hiding image regions
Crown for tooth 26, inLab/CEREC
Drawing the trimming line
1. Cut the distal and mesial neighbors away by entering an open line for
each of them (see "Trimming the preparation [ ➙ 131]“).
Instructions
2. Click the "Next" button.
9.7.4.5
Entering the preparation margin
Crown for tooth 26, inLab/CEREC
Entering and checking the preparation margin
1. Enter the preparation margin (see "Entering the preparation margin"
[ ➙ 135]) and check it by rotating the preparation.
Instructions
NOTICE
Directly editing the preparation margin
The preparation margin can be edited immediately after having been entered.
2. Click the button "Next".
202
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
9.7.4.6
Accepting a copying line
Suggested copying line
The program suggests a copying line (green line) for your acceptance.
NOTICE
The copying line can be extended to the start of the gingiva if necessary.
All areas outside of the copying line are generated by Biogenerics. This
is especially useful e.g. for cusp fractures. In this case, the fracture position is excluded from the copying line and enhanced by the software.
➢ Click the "Next" button.
ª The restoration is calculated and then displayed.
Restoration
9.7.4.7
Editing the restoration
1. Assess the restoration from all directions.
Instructions
2. Hide the neighboring teeth by clicking the "Trim" button.
3. Activate the contact surfaces by clicking the "Contact" button (see
"Showing/hiding the contact to the neighboring tooth (Contact)" [ ➙
31]).
4. As required adapt the contact surfaces using the "Design" tools.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
203
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Correlation
Operator's manual
Crown for tooth 26, inLab/CEREC
Insufficient contact
If the contact proves insufficient, you can extend the entire proximal surface with "Scale" tool (see "Scaling tool (Scale)" [ ➙ 44]).
Contact too strong
If the contact is too strong, you can correct it with the "Form" tool (see
"Form tool (Form)" [ ➙ 42]).
➢ After the design is finished, click the icon marked "Next".
9.7.4.8
Examining the milling preview
Crown for tooth 26, inLab/CEREC
Milling simulation
Instructions
The finished restoration is displayed in the milling preview (see ".Milling
Preview [ ➙ 145]“).
1. Inspect the restoration.
2. Select the desired milling mode.
3. Set the sprue location on a flat, convexly curved side.
204
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
9.7.4.9
Milling
Note on inEos
NOTICE
For inEos Blue
You can only perform this step with inEos Blue if a milling unit is available.
1. If you are satisfied with the restoration, click the "Mill" icon (see "Mill"
[ ➙ 144]).
Instructions
2. Start the milling process (see also Operating Instructions of the milling unit).
9.7.5
9.7.5.1
Design example for bridge
Creating a new restoration
✔ You have selected a patient from the database or created a new paInstructions
tient.
1. In the "New" dialog, select the information stated below.
2. Click "OK".
inLab bridge
9.7.5.2
Range
Value
"Restoration"
"Bridge"
"Design technique"
"Correlation"
Tooth
46-48
Taking an occlusal impression
Note on central location / Observe inLab info
NOTICE
Observe information
The occlusion of the tooth to be restored must be located in the center
of the image during the acquisition. Observe the information under "General information on the optical impression" [ ➙ 193].
Bridge (incl. inEos)
1. Prepare a wax model and attach it to the preparation model.
2. Fasten the preparation model with the wax model to the model holder.
3. Acquire the occlusion.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
205
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Correlation
Operator's manual
9.7.5.3
Acquiring the preparation
NOTICE
Preparation in center of image
The preparation of the tooth to be restored must be located in the center
of the image during the acquisition.
1. Remove the wax model from the preparation model.
2. Acquire the preparation.
3. If all of the required optical impressions are available, click the "Next"
icon.
9.7.5.4
Select the material and set the parameters
1. Select the material for the restoration and confirm with "OK".
2. Confirm the Parameter note dialog box with "OK".
3. If necessary, edit the changeable parameters in the Parameter dialog
box and confirm with "OK".
ª The 3D representation of the preparation is reconstructed and
then displayed in the 3D viewer.
Preparation
9.7.5.5
Trimming the model
➢ Trim the model if necessary.
206
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
9.7.5.6
Entering the preparation margin and base line
1. Enter the preparation margin of the first abutment and click "Next".
Entering the preparation margin
2. Enter the base line of the pontic and click "Next".
3. Enter the preparation margin of the last abutment.
NOTICE
Checking/editing the preparation margin and base line
You can check the preparation margin and the base line by rotating the
model and edit as required (Design tool). "Edit").
4. Click the button marked "Next".
9.7.5.7
Drawing a copying line
Drawing a copying line
1. Set the desired starting point with a double-click and draw a single,
continuous line around the area to be copied.
2. Close the copying line by double-clicking the starting point.
3. Check the copying line from every angle and edit it if necessary.
4. Click the "Next" icon.
9.7.5.8
Editing the restoration
1. Assess the restoration from all directions.
2. Click the button marked "Occlusion".
ª The occlusion is displayed.
3. If necessary, use the tool "Edit" to edit the proximal contact line, the
preparation margins and/or base lines.
4. Click the button marked "Next".
ª The finished restoration is displayed in the milling preview.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
207
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Correlation
Operator's manual
Restoration
9.7.5.9
Examining the milling preview
1. Inspect the restoration.
Milling simulation
NOTICE
Setting the distance
You can set the distance from the underside of the bridge elements to
the gingiva with the "Gingival spacing" parameter.
2. If necessary, edit the restoration with the free-formtools "Form",
"Drop" and "Shape".
9.7.5.10
Milling
Note on inEos
NOTICE
For inEos Blue
You can only perform this step with inEos Blue if a milling unit is available.
1. If you are satisfied with the restoration, click the "Mill" icon (see "Mill"
[ ➙ 144]).
Instructions
2. Start the milling process (see also Operating Instructions of the milling unit).
208
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
9.8 WaxUp
9.8.1
Preparations and creating the wax model
NOTICE
Observe working instructions for WaxUp
Observe the information and work steps in the document "Working instructions for WaxUp", Order No.: 60 01 361.
9.8.2
Scanning the object
1. Select "WaxUp" in the New dialog and enter your restoration data.
2. Click "OK".
3. Start the scanning process.
You obtain 6 different scanned images:
● 3 occlusal images
● 3 basal images
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
209
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
WaxUp
Operator's manual
9.8.3
Drawing the bottom line
This step is necessary in order to enable the software to distinguish between the inner and outer surface of the caps. This is important for ensuring the following:
● that the Spacer tools works properly,
● that material is only applied to the outer surface of the caps when automatically strengthening the wall thickness ("WaxUp wall thickness").
Drawing the bottom line
NOTICE
Draw bottom lines with offset
Draw the bottom line with a slight offset towards the interior, so that the
proper fit of the cervical margin is not affected by the spacer.
210
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
9.8.4
Defining the insertion axis on the screen
If you have carefully determined the insertion axis of the scan object in a
parallelometer, only minor corrections should be necessary at this point.
Is is essential, though, that you see as much as possible of the inner lateral walls of the scan object. What you can't see cannot be milled either.
Defining the insertion axis
9.8.5
Editing and checking the restoration
In this stage you can make any changes you wish to the object using the
existing "Design" tools. In this step you should also use the "Cut"tool to
check the cross-section of the connectors and correct it, if necessary.
Editing the restoration
9.8.6
Milling the restoration
1. Click the "Mill" icon.
2. Select the appropriate material.
3. Place the selected block in the milling unit and mill the object.
9.9 Implant
9.9.1
9.9.1.1
Introduction
About the software
All restorations that have been designed as restoration type "Implant" can
only be milled on the MC XL milling unit. Alternatively, these restorations
can be ordered via infiniDent.
Mesostructures from "inLab 3D for Abutments V3.10" cannot be loaded.
In order to make Straumann CARES abutments, select the "inLab for CARES" option in the "Restoration" menu. The "inLab for CARES" option is
available to you only if you have a 32-bit operating system.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
211
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Implant
Operator's manual
Straumann hyperlink
Further details can be found under "Abutments with Straumann CARES
[ ➙ 244]".
9.9.1.2
Indications
NOTICE
Position of the implant
The implant must be in a circular subgingival location.
If the location of the implant is only minimally supragingival, you can fill
it up with scan wax.
9.9.1.3
Explanation of the color markings
The red areas on the surface of the restoration mark the spots where no
restoration material will be left later on. Either because the restoration will
jut out of the blank there or because the screw channel is located there.
Restoration
The minimum permissible shape of the restoration is marked in blue. This
can be switched off by removing the check mark in the menu item "Window" / "Display options".
NOTICE
The display of the minimum permissible shape has no influence on the
milling result. If the minimum shape is visible and the mesostructure is
milled accordingly, a body is created that does not correspond to the
manufacturer's recommendations. The values may not comply with the
minimum solidity and the minimum adhesive surface.
These colored markings are also visible in the cut.
212
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
Cut display
NOTICE
Red marking function switched off
If, in the "Antagonist" window, a check mark is placed beside "Interocclusal Clearance", then the red marking is switched off in the milling preview.
9.9.1.4
Accessories
In order to guarantee product safety, for creating restorations in the design mode "Implant"/ "Mesostructure" or "Implant"/"Biogeneric", only original Sirona accessories or third-party accessories expressly approved
by Sirona must be used. The user is responsible for any damage resulting
from the use of non-approved accessories.
inCoris Zi meso blocks are available for milling the mesostructures.
inCoris Zi meso blocks
REF
Connection size
Color
62 31 802
S
F0.5
62 31 828
S
F2
62 31 810
L
F0.5
62 31 836
L
F2
You can stick the sintered mesostructure together with the suitable titanium base. You can select an appropriate titanium base depending on the
available implant. The following Sirona TiBase products are available
from trade outlets, which are each supplied with a titanium base, scanbody and abutment screw:
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
213
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Implant
Operator's manual
In addition, the CAD-CAM titanium bases from Camlog® can also be
used.
empty
Accessories for CAMLOG users
Scanbodies for CAMLOG® S
36 pcs, single-use, compatible with Camlog® D 3.3, D 3.8, D 4.3
REF. 62 82 615
Scanbodies for CAMLOG® L
36 pcs, single-use, compatible with D 5.0, D6.0
REF. 62 82 623
214
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
9.9.2
Mesostructure design technique
Design example of mesostructure with antagonist image for tooth 11
9.9.2.1
Creating a new restoration
✔ You have selected a patient from the database or created a new patient.
1. Select the following options in the New dialog box.
2. Click on "OK".
9.9.2.2
Range
Value
"Restoration"
"Implant"
"Design technique"
"Mesostructure"
Tooth
11
"Implant type"
Camlog 3.3
Scanning the antagonist and the preparation (implant situation)
1. Scan the antagonist and then scan the preparation (implant situation)
(see "Optical impression [ ➙ 94]“).
NOTICE
Preventing scan artifacts (for inEos only)
If a deep pit is located between the scanbody and the gingiva, you can
fill it up with scan wax in order to prevent scan artifacts.
2. If all of the required optical impressions are available, click the "Next"
button.
9.9.2.3
Setting parameters
Explanation: Parameter note
Following reconstruction of the 3D model, a note appears indicating that
the changeable parameters which influence the remaining design steps
will be displayed in the next dialog box. The remaining parameters are inactive. Confirmation of this note automatically opens the Parameters dialog box. The parameter note (like other warning messages) can be
switched off if desired.
1. Confirm the Parameter note dialog box with "OK".
2. If necessary, edit the changeable parameters in the Parameter dialog
box and confirm with "OK".
9.9.2.4
Displaying the 3D representation
The 3D representation of the preparation (implant situation) is reconstructed and then displayed in the 3D viewer.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
215
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Implant
Operator's manual
3D display
9.9.2.5
Entering the gingival line
1. Enter the gingival line and check it in the 3D viewer. Rotate the preparation for this purpose (implant situation).
Drawing the gingival line
NOTICE
Directly editing the gingival line
If necessary, the gingival line can be edited immediately after it is entered (see "Editing tool (Edit) [ ➙ 38]“).
2. Click the "Next" button.
ª You will be prompted to set the insertion axis.
9.9.2.6
Setting the insertion axis
1. Configure the insertion axis. When doing this, make sure that the
scanbody does not conceal any part of the gingival line.
Insertion axis
2. Click the "Next" button.
216
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
ª The restoration is calculated and then displayed.
9.9.2.7
Performing the design
You can use the "Position", "Rotate" and "Scale" tools to align and adjust
the restoration as required.
NOTICE
As soon as you release a direction key for any of these tools, the shoulder suitable for ceramics will be recalculated and displayed.
You can use "Edit" to edit the preparation margin on the gingival cavity.
The implant head is visible during editing.
You can use the "Antagonist" and "Gingivamask" buttons to display the
"Antagonist" and "Gingivamask" windows (see "Show/hide antagonist [➙
33]“, „Showing/hiding the occlusion/articulation/gingival mask [ ➙ 32]")
and with the aid of the Design tools, you can adapt the abutment shape
to the antagonist.
1. Adjust and align the restoration if necessary.
2. Edit the preparation margin if necessary.
3. After the design is finished, click on the "Next" button.
9.9.2.8
Examining the milling preview
✔ The finished restoration is displayed in the milling preview. The implant head is visible here too.
1. Inspect the restoration.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
217
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Implant
Operator's manual
Milling Preview
2. If necessary, edit the restoration with the "Form", "Drop" and "Shape"
tools.
9.9.2.9
Positioning the mesostructure optimally in the dental arch
empty
Seating the mesostructure virtually
A fully designed mesostructure can be virtually seated and can be used
as an aid for designing further mesostructures (see "Quadrant [ ➙ 63]“).
Cut display displayed with antagonists
empty
Displaying the abutment
If an impression of a prosthetic tooth/wax-up is acquired as an antagonist,
you can readily adjust/align the form and position of the abutment.
218
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
9.9.2.10
Milling a ceramic mesostructure
NOTICE
An inLab MC XL (or a CEREC MC XL) milling unit is required to mill the
ceramic mesostructure.
✔ The finished restoration design is displayed in the milling preview.
✔ 20mm milling instruments are clamped in the MC XL milling unit to
machine zirconia.
1. Click the "Mill" button.
ª The machine moves to the block insertion position.
2. Insert the suitable inCoris ZI meso block.
3. Press "Start".
ª The ceramic mesostructure is milled.
9.9.2.11
Finishing an abutment
Follow the instructions for manufacturing the mesostructure in the Processing Instructions for "inCoris ZI meso", and if necessary in the instructions for "TiBase".
9.9.3
9.9.3.1
Biogeneric design technique (with scanning of the implant
mask)
Create a new restoration
✔ You have selected a patient from the database or created a new patient.
1. Select the following options in the New dialog box.
2. Click on "OK".
9.9.3.2
Range
Value
"Restoration"
"Implant"
"Design technique"
"Biogeneric"
Tooth
11
"Implant type"
Camlog 3.3
Acquiring optical impressions
NOTICE
Preventing scan artifacts (for inEos only)
If a deep pit is located between the scanbody and the gingiva, you can
fill it up with scan wax in order to prevent scan artifacts.
If the implant mask is scanned without an inserted scanbody, it is recommended that the laboratory analog be covered.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
219
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Implant
Operator's manual
empty
Scanning the implant mask
➢ Have the implant mask scanned.
empty
Scanning the antagonist and the preparation (implant situation)
NOTICE
Position on the scan holder
When removing the implant mask, ensure that the position on the scan
holder is not changed. Otherwise you will have to perform manual correlation.
NOTICE
The order of grid scans
When scanning the preparation, be sure to use the same order for grid
scans as when scanning the implant mask.
1. Scan the antagonist and the preparation (implant situation) (see "Optical impression [ ➙ 94]“).
2. If all of the required optical impressions are available, click the "Next"
button.
Tip: If the scanbody does not conceal any important information about the
gingiva, you can simply copy the exposures from the image window "Preparation" into the image window "Gingivamask". To do this, proceed as
follows:
● inEos: Press and hold the "Ctrl" button and use the left mouse button
to select and copy the images.
● inEos blue: If you drag an optical impression or a thumbnail from one
image field to another, a small context menu opens after you release
the mouse button. In this menu, you can select whether the optical
impression should be copied or moved.
9.9.3.3
Setting parameters
Explanation: Parameter note
Following reconstruction of the 3D model, a note appears indicating that
the changeable parameters which influence the remaining design steps
will be displayed in the next dialog box. The remaining parameters are inactive. Confirmation of this note automatically opens the Parameters dialog box. The parameter note (like other warning messages) can be
switched off if desired.
1. Confirm the Parameter note dialog box with "OK".
2. If necessary, edit the changeable parameters in the Parameter dialog
box and confirm with "OK".
220
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
9.9.3.4
Trimming the preparation
Recommendation note
NOTICE
Recommendation
We recommend always performing the trimming step, because the subsequent automatic exposure procedure can also cut out parts of the
adjacent teeth.
1. Trim the preparation (see "Trimming the preparation [ ➙ 131]“).
Trimming the preparation
2. Click the "Next" button.
9.9.3.5
Trimming the antagonist
1. Trim the antagonist (if present, see "Trimming the antagonist [ ➙
132]“).
2. Click the "Next" button.
9.9.3.6
Entering the gingival line
1. Enter the gingival line and check it in the 3D viewer. Rotate the preparation for this purpose (implant situation).
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
221
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Implant
Operator's manual
NOTICE
Directly editing the gingival line
If necessary, the gingival line can be edited immediately after it is entered (see "Editing tool (Edit) [ ➙ 38]“).
2. Click the "Next" button.
9.9.3.7
Setting the insertion axis
1. Configure the insertion axis. When doing this, make sure that the
scanbody does not conceal any part of the gingival line.
Insertion axis
2. Click the "Next" button.
ª The restoration is calculated and then displayed.
9.9.3.8
Designing a restoration
✔ A biogeneric first suggestion is calculated.
Design
1. You can use the "Position" and "Rotate" tools to align the restoration
as required.
2. Using the "Design" tools "Scale", "Edit", "Form", and "Drop" you can
modify the restoration until it fits perfectly into the overall environment.
3. Click the "Next" button.
222
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
9.9.3.9
Reducing a restoration
Reduce
1. Click twice in succession on the black "R" in the center of the "Reduce" tool to start reduction with the previously set parameters.
ª The area to be reduced is displayed as transparent.
2. You can also make changes here using the "Design"-"Form" and
"Drop" tools.
3. Click the "Next" button.
9.9.3.10
Examining the milling preview
Milling Preview
The free-form tools "Form", "Drop" and "Shape" can be used here as well.
If a checkmark is placed beside "Block Visualization" in the milling preview, then you can recognize the drill hole in the block.
If you select the menu item "Abutment Crown" from the "Design" menu,
then the inLab 3D program is automatically started and you can mill the
abutment crown there.
If you select the "Quadrant…" menu item from the "Design" menu, then
you can perform quadrant restoration. All possible restoration types and
design techniques are available.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
223
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Implant
Operator's manual
A new inLab 3D program is started automatically.
9.9.3.11
Milling a ceramic mesostructure
NOTICE
An inLab MC XL (or a CEREC MC XL) milling unit is required to mill the
ceramic mesostructure.
✔ The finished restoration design is displayed in the milling preview.
✔ 20mm milling instruments are clamped in the MC XL milling unit to
machine zirconia.
1. Click the "Mill" button.
ª The machine moves to the block insertion position.
2. Insert the suitable inCoris ZI meso block.
3. Press "Start".
ª The ceramic mesostructure is milled.
9.9.3.12
Finishing an abutment
Follow the instructions for manufacturing the mesostructure in the Processing Instructions for "inCoris ZI meso", and if necessary in the instructions for "TiBase".
9.9.3.13
Milling an abutment crown
1. In order to mill a crown that fits the abutment you just designed, select
the "Design" menu and then the "Abutment Crown" menu item.
Abutment crown procedure
ª A new inLab 3D software milling preview is opened automatically.
NOTICE
Make sure no more changes are made to the crown or the abutment
which could affect the fit.
2. Click the "Mill" button.
3. Start the milling process (see also Operating Instructions of the milling unit).
224
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
9.9.4
9.9.4.1
Biogeneric design technique (without scanning of the implant mask)
Create a new restoration
✔ You have selected a patient from the database or created a new patient.
1. Select the following options in the New dialog box.
2. Click on "OK".
9.9.4.2
Range
Value
"Restoration"
"Implant"
"Design technique"
"Biogeneric"
Tooth
11
"Implant type"
Camlog 3.3
Acquiring optical impressions
1. Scan the antagonist and the preparation (implant situation) (see "Optical impression [ ➙ 94]“).
NOTICE
Preventing scan artifacts (for inEos only)
If a deep pit is located between the scanbody and the gingiva, you can
fill it up with scan wax in order to prevent scan artifacts.
2. If all of the required optical impressions are available, click the "Next"
button.
9.9.4.3
Setting parameters
Explanation: Parameter note
Following reconstruction of the 3D model, a note appears indicating that
the changeable parameters which influence the remaining design steps
will be displayed in the next dialog box. The remaining parameters are inactive. Confirmation of this note automatically opens the Parameters dialog box. The parameter note (like other warning messages) can be
switched off if desired.
1. Confirm the Parameter note dialog box with "OK".
2. If necessary, edit the changeable parameters in the Parameter dialog
box and confirm with "OK".
9.9.4.4
Trimming the preparation
Recommendation note
NOTICE
Recommendation
We recommend always performing the trimming step, because the subsequent automatic exposure procedure can also cut out parts of the
adjacent teeth.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
225
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Implant
Operator's manual
1. Trim the preparation (see "Trimming the preparation [ ➙ 131]“).
Trimming the preparation
2. Click the "Next" button.
9.9.4.5
Trimming the antagonist
1. Trim the antagonist (if present, see "Trimming the antagonist [ ➙
132]“).
2. Click the "Next" button.
9.9.4.6
Setting a marking point
1. Double-click on the head of the scanbody to set a marking point.
2. Click the "Next" button.
226
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
9.9.4.7
Setting the insertion axis
1. Configure the insertion axis. When doing this, make sure that the
scanbody does not conceal any part of the gingival line.
Insertion axis
2. Click the "Next" button.
ª The restoration is calculated and then displayed.
9.9.4.8
Designing a restoration
✔ A biogeneric first suggestion is calculated.
Design
1. You can use the "Position" and "Rotate" tools to align the restoration
as required.
2. Using the "Design" tools "Scale", "Edit", "Form", and "Drop" you can
modify the restoration until it fits perfectly into the overall environment.
3. Click the "Next" button.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
227
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Implant
Operator's manual
9.9.4.9
Reducing a restoration
Reduce
1. Click twice in succession on the black "R" in the center of the "Reduce" tool to start reduction with the previously set parameters.
ª The area to be reduced is displayed as transparent.
2. You can also make changes here using the "Design"-"Form" and
"Drop" tools.
3. Click the "Next" button.
9.9.4.10
Examining the milling preview
Milling Preview
The free-form tools "Form", "Drop" and "Shape" can be used here as well.
If a checkmark is placed beside "Block Visualization" in the milling preview, then you can recognize the drill hole in the block.
If you select the menu item "Abutment Crown" from the "Design" menu,
then the inLab 3D program is automatically started and you can mill the
abutment crown there.
If you select the "Quadrant…" menu item from the "Design" menu, then
you can perform quadrant restoration. All possible restoration types and
design techniques are available.
A new inLab 3D program is started automatically.
228
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
9.9.4.11
Milling a ceramic mesostructure
NOTICE
An inLab MC XL (or a CEREC MC XL) milling unit is required to mill the
ceramic mesostructure.
✔ The finished restoration design is displayed in the milling preview.
✔ 20mm milling instruments are clamped in the MC XL milling unit to
machine zirconia.
1. Click the "Mill" button.
ª The machine moves to the block insertion position.
2. Insert the suitable inCoris ZI meso block.
3. Press "Start".
ª The ceramic mesostructure is milled.
9.9.4.12
Finishing an abutment
Follow the instructions for manufacturing the mesostructure in the Processing Instructions for "inCoris ZI meso", and if necessary in the instructions for "TiBase".
9.9.4.13
Milling an abutment crown
1. In order to mill a crown that fits the abutment you just designed, select
the "Design" menu and then the "Abutment Crown" menu item.
Abutment crown procedure
ª A new inLab 3D software milling preview is opened automatically.
NOTICE
Make sure no more changes are made to the crown or the abutment
which could affect the fit.
2. Click the "Mill" button.
3. Start the milling process (see also Operating Instructions of the milling unit).
9.10 Reduced
9.10.1
Reduced crown design technique
In the New dialog box, for "Crown" restorations, you can select the design
technique "Reduced".
First, a biogenerically generated crown is suggested, which can be adapted to the neighboring teeth and antagonist.
An additional design step is added between "adaptation of the design"
and "milling preview" that permits reduction of the crown.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
229
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Reduced
Operator's manual
Reduce tool
If the "Reduce" design procedure is selected in the New dialog box, the
Design tool "Shape" does not appear, the tool "Reduce" appears instead.
Two new designations appear in the status line for "Margin" and "Reduction".
Description of the "Reduce": tool
● Dark blue buttons – change the reduction strength ("Reduced")
● Light blue buttons - change the width of the margin, which remains
unreduced ("Margin")
● Black "R" in the center – starts the reduction
9.10.1.1
Full reduction
A click on the black "R“ is sufficient to reduce the entire crown. If you are
not satisfied with the result, you can undo the reduction with the red "Undo" arrow.
9.10.1.2
Partial reduction
Should you only wish to reduce part of the crown, as with the "Shape"tool
you can draw a closed line to the surface of the crown. The yellow model
is hidden during the drawing process. This enables you to draw the line
up to the cervical margin, in which case it is very helpful to select automatic edge detection (space bar).
When you have finished drawing the line, it can be edited as usual (beginning and ending with a double-click on the line).
As soon as you are satisfied with the position of the line, you can click the
black "R" button. Part of the surface appears orange-colored. You can
change this orange-colored area by pressing the space bar. If you click
the black "R" button again, the orange-colored area will be reduced.
9.10.1.3
Milling preview
If you click the green "Next"arrow, the milling preview appears.The freeform tools "Form", "Drop" and "Shape" are at your disposal here again.
230
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
9.10.1.4
Example for front tooth crown with cutback using partial reduction
1. Draw in a circular line for the partial reduction.
2. Click the black "R" button.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
231
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Reduced
Operator's manual
3. Click the black "R" button once again.
4. Click the green "Next"arrow to go to the milling preview.
5. Draw a pair of open "Shape"lines in the milling preview straight
through the incisal edge and click the "Shape"minus tool to press in
the area.
9.10.2
Reduced bridge design technique
In the New dialog box, for "Bridge" restorations, you can select the design
technique "Reduced".
This involves a combination of the crown "Reduced" and bridge "Biogeneric" design techniques, which can be used to design an anatomical,
partially or fully reduced bridge with connectors.
Draw in the preparation lines and base lines.
232
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
Once all of the teeth have been set up, you can make the finishing touches on each tooth. A double-click on an unselected gray tooth selects
the tooth and allows you to change the selected tooth using all of the available tools.
Clicking on the "Next" icon again takes you to the reduction step. For
selected crowns, the "Form", "Drop" and "Reduce" tools are also available. Half of the neighboring crowns are hidden on both sides of a selected
crown to give you a better overview.
The reduction can be performed separately for each element. In the present example, number 4 is fully reduced, numbers 5 and 6 are partially
reduced and number 7 is anatomically unchanged ().
If you are satisfied with the crowns and pontics of the bridge, you can click
the green "Next" arrow. You will receive a suggestion for connectors.
As for a bridge "FrameWork", with the reduction tool switched off, in this
step you can double-click to select a connector and then change it with
the usual tools.
As soon as you are satisfied with the design of the bridge, you can click
the green "Next" arrow to change to the milling preview, where the free
forming tools "Form", "Drop" and "Shape" are available for the final finer
details.
NOTICE
Checking the material thicknesses
Use the thickness measurement to check all material thicknesses of the
reduction.
When using the "Cut" tool, the cut surface is displayed in the status bar.
This allows you to verify the connector thickness.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
233
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Multilayer
Operator's manual
9.11 Multilayer
✔ You have selected a patient from the database or created a new patient.
1. In the New dialog, select e.g. "Bridge" as the restoration, and the
"Multilayer" design technique.
2. Take exposures of the preparation, the antagonist (if applicable), and
further images depending on the selected bite registration technique.
ª After the model has been calculated, a material selection dialog
is displayed in which you are prompted to define the materials for
the framework and the veneer structure.
3. Trim the model and the antagonist (if applicable).
4. Draw in the preparation lines and base lines.
NOTICE
Draw in the base line so that the position and size correspond approximately to the pontic to be replaced.
5. Using the parameter "Lingual open angle", you can adapt the pontic
on the lingual side to guarantee accessibility when cleaning. This parameter must be set prior to the calculation of the first suggestion.
6. Set the insertion axis and click the "Next" icon.
ª A selection menu appears in which the type of tooth shape can
be selected.
7. Select "Individual" for biogeneric calculation based on the neighboring teeth. If no suitable neighboring teeth are available, select a preferential tooth shape: "adult", "youth", "lepto", "athlet", "pykno" or
"asia".
8. Confirm your choice by clicking the "OK" button.
9. This suggestion can be changed individually using the usual tools.
For bridges, ensure that you set a sufficiently large connector crosssection. The connector cross-sections for the current active tooth position are displayed in the status bar.
ª If a connector cross-section that is too small has been selected,
the corresponding field in the status bar turns red. For precise
checking of the connector, select the "Contact" button in the View
window.
10. As soon as you switch to the milling preview, the restoration is graphically broken down into a framework and the covering veneer structure. You can now make further changes to the framework if required.
When applying material above the shoulder, ensure that you do not
generate any undercuts that may impair the placement of the veneer
structure.
234
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
11. To start the milling process of the framework, click on the "Mill" icon.
12. To also mill the veneer structure, select the "Edit veneering
structure…" option in the "Design" menu in the milling preview. This
opens the inLab 3D software again and loads the veneer structure in
the milling preview.
9.12 Quadrant restoration
9.12.1
Acquiring tooth 16
✔ You have selected a patient from the database or created a new paInstructions
tient.
1. Select the following options in the New dialog box.
NOTICE
Start with an inlay if necessary
If an inlay is also to be provided, then start with this restoration.
2. Click "OK".
ª The arrow cursor jumps automatically to the button marked "Acquire
preparation".
9.12.2
Range
Value
"Restoration"
"Inlay, Onlay, Partial crown"
"Design technique"
"Biogeneric"
Tooth
16
Tooth 16: Creating the restoration
Restoration of tooth 16
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
235
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Quadrant restoration
Operator's manual
1. Define tooth 16 as the center (see "Centering" under "Design" [ ➙
65]).
2. Create a restoration.
3. Save the restoration.
4. Choose "Design"/"Quadrant…" (see "Quadrant" under "Design" [ ➙
63]).
ª The New dialog box opens. The patient is accepted.
5. In the New dialog box, you can select the following and confirm with
"OK".
ª The virtual seating and the start of a second inLab 3D program
then occur.
In the program running in the foreground, the old restoration is in
its original state.
CAUTION
Limitations
Following virtual seating you may no longer perform the following: Return to the "Optical impression" work step with the "Undo" icon, remove
or add images, change the reference image!
6. Mill the restoration.
9.12.3
Tooth 15: Creating the restoration
Tooth 16 seated virtually, restoration of tooth 15
The program with the virtually seated restoration is loaded in the background. You can bring the program to the foreground via the task bar or
by pressing the task selection keys (Alt+Tab).
The finished design (tooth 16) appears as the tooth in the new display.
1. Click the preparation to be edited (tooth 15).
2. Click the "Fix" button.
3. Trim the model.
4. Click the "Next" button.
5. Draw the preparation margin.
6. Define the insertion axis for tooth 15 (see "Redefining the insertion
axis" [ ➙ 138]).
236
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
7. Click the "Next" button.
8. Create a restoration (see the design examples in the preceding sections).
9. Save the restoration.
10. Choose "Design"/"Quadrant…" (see "Quadrant" under "Design" [ ➙
63]).
ª This is followed by the virtual seating and the start of another inLab 3D program.
11. Mill the restoration.
9.12.4
Tooth 14: Creating the restoration
Tooth 16 and 15 seated virtually, restoration of tooth 14
1. Create the restoration for tooth 14 analogously to tooth 16 and 15.
2. Save the restoration.
3. Mill the restoration.
9.12.5
Tooth 17: Creating the restoration
Tooth 16, 15 and 14 seated virtually, restoration of tooth 17
1. Create the restoration for tooth 17 analogously to tooth 16 and 15.
2. Save the restoration.
3. Mill the restoration.
9.13 Milling models
CAUTION when using milling cutters
NOTICE
Make sure the correct tools are used
Specific tools (milling cutters) are required for milling the models on the
inLab MC XL. The milling cutters will be used as follows:
Set 1: Finisher 10
Set 2: Shaper 25
➢ Do not use the milling instruments for restorations in order to produce models.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
237
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Milling models
Operator's manual
CAUTION when using milling cutters
NOTICE
Make sure the milling cutters are used correctly
If the milling cutters are not used as described below, this may cause damage to the milling unit.
➢ Use the Shaper 25 and Finisher 10 milling cutters only in inLab MC
XL milling units, as of serial number 120 000 or in inLab XL milling
units that have been upgraded using the motor upgrade kit for inLab
(REF 6338631).
➢ Use the Shaper 25 and Finisher 10 milling cutters only for manufacturing models from the inCoris S model (REF 6299361) and inCoris
L model blocks (REF 6299379).
9.13.1
Introduction
✔ A digital impression is available in the CEREC Connect portal.
1. Download the digital impression from the CEREC Connect portal
(see CEREC Connect portal [ ➙ 267]) and acquire it.
ª The "Select patient for new restoration" dialog box opens in the
inLab 3D software.
2. Select "Dentist" and "Patient" or create new ones.
ª The "Connect order change" dialog box opens.
3. In the "Connect order change" dialog box, select the "Model" restoration type.
ª "MCXL Model" is automatically selected as the design technique.
9.13.2
Correcting an optical impression
In the next step, you have the option of correcting the digital impression.
238
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
"Cut", "Smooth" and "Replace" tools are available to you for this purpose.
Correction tools for milling models
empty
Cut
Parts of the model can be cut away using the "Cut" function.
1. Start to draw a line by double-clicking near to the model.
2. Drag the line in the desired direction and click in order to set further
points of the line.
3. Finish the process by double clicking.
NOTICE
Cutting away frayed model parts
It is important to cut away any frayed model parts using the "Cut" function, otherwise unfavorable segment levels may occur when milling the
model segments.
empty
Smooth
Areas on the model can be smoothed using the "Smooth" function. The
function is similar to smoothing "Form" and "Drop" tools (see Form tool [➙
42] and Drop tool [ ➙ 43]).
empty
Replace
Areas on the model that you wish to replace can be selected using the
"Replace" function.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
239
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Milling models
Operator's manual
1. Select the area by drawing a circle.
2. Start the process by pressing the space bar.
ª The area to be replaced is inserted with the surroundings.
9.13.3
Drawing or editing the preparation margin
In this step, the preparation margin can be drawn (see "Entering the preparation margin [ ➙ 135]“).
The preparation margin can also be edited, should this be necessary.
1. Start the process by double clicking on the blue line.
2. Redraw accordingly and finish the process by double clicking.
ª The line appears in green after it has been redrawn.
9.13.4
Aligning models
In this step, models are aligned virtually. Two additional windows show
the model plates, which display the defined distance between the upper
and lower plate.
240
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
1. Position the models by rotating (left mouse button) and moving (right
mouse button) between the plates in such a way that all necessary
regions are available. This can be done in both help windows or in the
main window.
ª Red regions show areas on the model that cannot be correctly
milled out, while yellow regions display undercuts.
2. Align the model centrally between the model plates in such a way
that, if possible, no red areas or undercuts appear.
The model view in both additional windows can be altered using the "Buc-
cal/Lingual" button.
The preparation and the antagonist can be exchanged in both additional
windows using the "Upper/Lower" button.
9.13.5
Segmenting the model
In this step, the model is sawn in order to create the single stumps required on the one hand, and to generate the segments that can be milled
from the block on the other hand.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
241
Restoration types and design techniques
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Milling models
Operator's manual
empty
Segmenting the preparation
1. Begin the saw cut by double clicking on the model.
2. Click to set further points of the line. Arched saw cuts can also be set.
ª Red areas display regions that do not fit into the block and that
must be sawn into smaller segments.
Tip: The saw cut line can also be set via the preparation margin. The preparation limit is taken into account when cutting and the saw cut is then
always made near to this.
empty
Segmenting antagonists
The antagonist must also be sawn.
1. Change the antagonist view by clicking the "Upper jaw" button.
2. Set the saw cuts to such a length that no red areas can be seen on
the model.
9.13.6
Exposing the preparation margin
In this step, the preparation margin can be exposed. This function can be
used only for single stumps.
1. Double click on a single stump.
ª This is displayed zoomed in.
2. Click the "Ditch" button.
ª The preparation margin is exposed.
242
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Restoration types and design techniques
Operator's manual
3. Click the "Return" button.
ª You then return to the model and can expose the preparation
margin at the next stump.
Tip: In this step, the preparation margin can be altered again (see "Drawing or editing the preparation margin [ ➙ 240]“).
9.13.7
Positioning models
In this step, the models are virtually positioned on the model plates.
You can choose between the quadrant and full jaw model base plates.
1. Click in the blue area of the model segments to move (right mouse
button) or to rotate (left mouse button) the models.
2. Click the "Auto Select" button.
ª The software automatically attempts to set two pins per model
segment.
3. Alternatively, you can also set pins manually by clicking on the pinholes on the plate.
4. Ensure that each segment has two pins. Pinholes marked red can be
found in areas that do not have enough material. They are not prepared in full.
9.13.8
Saving and exporting a model
In this step, the software calculates the virtual model with saw cuts and
pinholes.
➢ Click on the "Save" icon in the inLab 3D software.
empty
inLab 3D Stack software
1. Open your inLab 3D Stack software.
2. In the "Settings" menu, select the option "MCXL-Model Mode".
3. Click on the "New" icon and select the desired case.
4. Choose the segments that you wish to mill and click on the "Add" icon
in the left-hand tool bar.
ª The segments are automatically positioned in the block.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
243
Abutments with Straumann CARES
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
How to use the scanbody
Operator's manual
10
Abutments with Straumann CARES
NOTICE
The "inLab for CARES" option is only available if you have a 32-bit operating system.
10.1 How to use the scanbody
10.1.1
Scanbody
CAUTION
Risk of infection for the patient
The scanbody is not delivered in aseptic condition.
Prior to using the scanbody in the patient's mouth, you must disinfect it
and attach a thread to prevent the patient from swallowing or inhaling it.
10.1.2
Explanation of the symbols
Protect against direct sunlight.
This product bears the CE mark in accordance with the provisions of
Council Directive 93/42/EEC of June 14, 1993 concerning medical devices.
Intended only for single use.
Month of manufacture
Batch number
10.1.3
Preparing a model for inEos
✔ A master model with manipulation implants is available.
1. If no CAM base was used, prepare the area surrounding each implant
situation with powder or scan spray.
2. Plug a scanbody onto each manipulation implant of the master model
until it comes to rest on the shoulder of the implant without any gaps.
The scanbody is scannable without powder or scan spray.
244
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Abutments with Straumann CARES
Operator's manual
10.1.4
Preparing a model for the scanner (inLab)
✔ A master model with manipulation implants is available.
1. Plug a scanbody onto each manipulation implant of the master model
until it comes to rest on the shoulder of the implant without any gaps.
2. Duplicate a scan model of each implant situation. The scanbody of
the scan model must point upward vertically, i.e. must be visible without undercuts.
3. Glue this model onto the model holder in such a way that it points toward the clamping shank A in the mesial –> direction.
10.2 General information
10.2.1
Cooperation with the Straumann Company
In cooperation with the Straumann Company, you can design custom abutments with the inLab 3D software and then order them from infiniDent
(http://www.infinident.de). They are manufactured at the Straumann production center.
10.2.2
Indications
NOTICE
Position of the implant
The implant must be in a circular subgingival location.
If the location of the implant is only minimally supragingival, you can fill
it up with scan wax.
10.2.3
Further information
● The "Gingival depth" parameter is described under "Parameters, Gingival depth".
● For information on Entering the gingival line see "Design, gingival
line".
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
245
Abutments with Straumann CARES
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Mesostructure design technique
Operator's manual
10.3 Mesostructure design technique
Design example of mesostructure with antagonist image for tooth 23
10.3.1
Creating a new restoration
✔ You have selected a patient from the database or created a new patient.
1. Select the following options in the New dialog box.
2. Click on "OK".
10.3.2
Range
Value
"Restoration"
"Implant"
"Design technique"
"Mesostructure"
Tooth
23
"Implant type"
Straumann RN
Scanning the antagonist and the preparation (implant situation)
1. Scan the antagonist1 and then the preparation scanned (implant situation) (see "Optical impressions with the scanner").
NOTICE
Preventing scan artifacts
If a deep pit is located between the scanbody and the gingiva, you can
fill it up with scan wax in order to prevent scan artifacts.
2. If all of the required optical impressions are available, click the "Next"
button.
10.3.3
Select the material and set the parameters
1. Select the material for the restoration and confirm with "OK".
1. This may be a mushbite in the conventional sense or an impression of a waxup
as a "virtual silicone key".
246
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Abutments with Straumann CARES
Operator's manual
Material selection
2. Confirm the Parameter note dialog box with "OK".
3. If necessary, edit the changeable parameters in the Parameter dialog
box and confirm with "OK".
10.3.4
Displaying the 3D representation
The 3D representation of the preparation (implant situation) is reconstructed and then displayed in the 3D viewer.
3D display
10.3.5
Entering the gingival line
1. Enter the gingival line (see "Gingival line") and check it in the 3D viewer. Rotate the preparation for this purpose (implant situation).
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
247
Abutments with Straumann CARES
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Mesostructure design technique
Operator's manual
Entering the gingival line
NOTICE
Directly editing the gingival line
The gingival line can be edited immediately after having been entered
(see "Edit tool (edit)").
2. Click the "Next" button.
ª The restoration is calculated and then displayed.
10.3.6
Performing the design
The red areas on the surface of the restoration mark the spots where no
restoration material will be left later on. Either because the restoration will
jut out of the blank there or because the screw channel is located there.
Restoration
The minimum permissible shape of the restoration is marked in blue.
These colored markings are also visible in the cut.
248
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Abutments with Straumann CARES
Operator's manual
Cut display
You can use the "Position", "Rotate" and "Scale" tools to align and adjust
the restoration as required.
You can use "Edit" to edit the preparation margin on the gingival cavity.
The implant head is visible during editing.
Preparation margin
Using the Antagonist button, you can display the Antagonist window (see
"Show/hide antagonist") and adapt the abutment shape to the antagonist
with the help of the Design tools.
NOTICE
Red marking function switched off
If the interocclusal clearance is activated, the red marking function is
switched off.
1. Adjust and align the restoration if necessary.
2. Edit the preparation margin if necessary.
3. After the design is finished, click on the "Next" button.
10.3.7
Viewing the milling simulation
✔ The finished restoration is displayed in the milling simulation. The implant head is visible here too.
1. Inspect the restoration.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
249
Abutments with Straumann CARES
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Mesostructure design technique
Operator's manual
Milling simulation
2. If necessary, edit the restoration with the tools "Form", "Drop" and
"Shape".
10.3.8
Positioning the abutment optimally in the dental arch
empty
Seating the abutment virtually
A completely designed abutment can be seated virtually and used as an
aid for designing further abutments (see "Quadrant" in the chapter on
"Design").
Cut display displayed with antagonists
empty
Displaying the abutment
If an impression of a prosthetic tooth/waxup is acquired as an antagonist,
you can readily adjust/align the shape and position of the abutment.
250
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Abutments with Straumann CARES
Operator's manual
10.3.9
Sending an abutment
1. If you are satisfied with the restoration, click on the "Send" icon.
ª A message then appears stating that the restoration has been
prepared for sending.
2. Click on "OK".
NOTICE
PC without Internet
If the PC on which you are operating the inLab 3D software has no Internet connection, you can export the restoration and sent it to infiniDent
from another PC.
3. Start the Upload tool to send the restoration to the milling center (see
"infiniDent Upload tool").
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
251
Messages
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Information
Operator's manual
11
Messages
Three different types of messages can be distinguished.
● Information
● Warnings
● Error messages
11.1 Information
empty
Description
These messages prompt you to perform a specific operation or inform
you that a specific action is not possible at the moment.
empty
Example
Two examples of this are the messages that a milling instrument should
be replaced or that the milling unit is busy.
11.2 Warnings
empty
Description
This type of message is also used to remind you of important user actions
or to warn you about problems.
11.3 Error messages
empty
Description
An error message means that an action could not be executed. The program and the data are usually restored to the state in which they were prior to the action.
empty
Different variations
The individual error messages may vary. The following variations exist:
● Self-explanatory error messages
● Other types of errors (two-stage errors)
252
–
Errors in connection with determining or managing construction
lines
–
Errors in the reconstruction of the restoration
–
System errors
–
Memory allocation errors
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Messages
Operator's manual
11.3.1
Self-explanatory error messages
Self-explanatory error message
This type of error message is used whenever the cause of the error is unambiguous. You will be given detailed information on required action
whenever possible.
11.3.2
Two-stage errors
Other error messages are displayed in two stages. The basic error is displayed first.
You then have the possibility of having further details displayed. If error
messages of this type appear repeatedly during a design process, you
should forward the design in question to Sirona Dental Systems along
with a description of the procedure you have followed.
With the exception of memory allocation errors, you can usually acknowledge the error message and continue working after an error has occurred.
11.3.3
Errors in connection with determining or managing construction lines
Two-stage errors
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
253
Messages
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Error messages
Operator's manual
This type of error typically occurs whenever the construction lines are unsuitable. It may, however, also be caused by a program error.
When you click Yes, a dialog box with further details and hints opens.
The error description, i.e. the ID, is used by the hotline or development
team to analyze and eliminate the problem.
In most cases, you can continue to work with the restoration data after
acknowledging the error. However, just to make sure, you can create a
copy and work with this copy. In this way, you can always recur to the original optical impression in case further problems occur.
11.3.4
Errors in the reconstruction of the restoration
Errors in the reconstruction of the restoration
This error may occur if the restoration is to be milled. In this case, the restoration to be milled cannot be calculated with the available construction
lines.
As before, you can usually continue to work with the restoration data after
acknowledging this error message. For reasons of safety, you may of
course work on a copy.
Check and correct all construction lines, if necessary.
11.3.5
System errors
System errors
A system error may occur due to an error in the program.
254
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Messages
Operator's manual
Detailed information
Two different types of detailed information can then follow.
Despite these error messages, you can continue to work with the existing
design data, but for reasons of safety, you should always use a copy for
doing so.
11.3.6
Memory allocation errors
Memory allocation errors
The occurrence of a memory allocation error means that the program or
operating system is in a critical state.
1. Exit the program.
2. Save any available design data under another name.
3. If this error occurs again, terminate all running programs and restart
the operating system.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
255
Link to Practice Administration
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Parameter interface
Operator's manual
12
Link to Practice Administration
NOTICE
Entering the patient data
If there is an interface to a practice administration program, the patient
data should be entered in the practice administration program and edited as required.
12.1 Parameter interface
12.1.1
Patient data as parameter list
Some practice administration programs can be configured so that they
can pass on patient data as a parameter list.
12.1.2
Parameter interface: CerPI.exe
With this parameter interface, you can conveniently perform the following:
● Generate new patients in the data structure
–
With database connection
–
Without database connection
● Preselect existing patients in the following dialog boxes
12.1.3
–
"Load restoration"
–
"Delete restoration"
–
"Select patient for new restoration"
Generating or preselecting patients
Launch the CerPI.exe program by entering the following data:
● CerPI.exe
● Minus sign (-)
● Card index number;
● First name;
● Last name;
● Date of birth;
The date of birth must be entered in the format specified in the Windows
Regional Settings: in the format DD.MM.YYYY (e.g.: 27.03.1964) or MM/
DD/YYYY (e.g.: 03/27/1964).
CAUTION
Entering the data
Following the card index number, first name, last name, date of birth,
you MUST always enter a semicolon (;).
256
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Link to Practice Administration
Operator's manual
empty
Example
CerPI.exe -0815;first name;last name;15.11.2000;
empty
Result
Database connection
With database connection
Without database connection
The patient is registered in the
SIRONA database.
The patient is generated in the local
data structure.
12.2 SLIDA interface
NOTICE
The SLIDA interface is only available for devices with a 32-bit operating
system (e.g. not for inEos Blue users).
empty
Only with database connection
If the database connection is used, it is possible to send patient data to
inLab via the SLIDA interface.
empty
Modifying patient data via the SLIDA interface
You can create new patients, change patient data and activate patients.
The mail slot for the SLIDA interface is set up during the installation of the
database.
empty
No editing of patient data in inLab
Patients registered in the SIRONA database via the SLIDA interface can
be deleted in the inLab 3D application, but not edited. The reason for this
is that the SIRONA database contains only copies and no originals.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
257
Tips and Tricks
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Screenshot/TIF image
Operator's manual
13
Tips and Tricks
13.1 Screenshot/TIF image
Description
The SIROCAM application is perfectly suitable for exporting TIF images
of preparations or forwarding them to a graphics program for further processing.
empty
Generating a screenshot
Since TIF images of preparations do not show any constructions lines, it
may be necessary to generate a screenshot:
✔ The desired contents are visible on the screen.
Instructions
1. Press the key marked "Print".
2. Open a graphics program of your choice (e.g. Paint).
3. In this program, select "Edit" / "Paste".
13.2 Technical notes
13.2.1
Softguard dongle
Instructions
A device (printer, external drive) connected additionally to the softguard
donglesoftguard dongle can impair its function.
1. Remove the connection to this device.
2. Check to see whether the parallel port is set to EPP in the BIOS setup
of the PC. Use the manual for the motherboard as a reference.
13.2.2
Problems during communication with the milling unit
Communication
If no communication can be established with the milling unit, check the
port and baud rate settings under "Settings"/"Configuration"/"Devices..."/
"Configure" .
Radio link to milling unit
Under unfavorable radio conditions, problems can arise in the communication with the milling unit. Switch the radio module of the milling unit off
(pull out the plug) and then back on and try again.
13.2.2.1
Examples with CEREC 3 acquisition unit connected
Cable connection
258
Port=COM2
Baud rate=115200
Cable connection, long Port=COM2
Baud rate=19200
EU radio link
Port=COM1
Baud rate=115200
U.S. radio link
(Höft&Wessel)
Port=COM1
Baud rate=115200
U.S. radio link (Futuba) Port=COM1
Baud rate=19200
Japan radio link (Futuba)
Baud rate=19200
Port=COM1
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Tips and Tricks
Operator's manual
13.2.2.2
For PC/notebook
Check the "Communications Port" (interface).
1. Select "Start"/"Settings"/"Control panel".
System Properties
2. Double-click "System".
3. In "System Properties", select the "Hardware" tab and click on "Device Manager".
Device Manager
4. Double-click "Ports (COM and LPT)". Here you can see which "Communications Port" is available (e.g. COM1, COM2).
5. Set the port displayed here via the menu option "Settings"/"Configuration"/"Devices..."/"Configure" (see "Devices [ ➙ 80]" under "Configuration [ ➙ 80]“).
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
259
Tips and Tricks
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Service program
Operator's manual
13.2.3
No sleep mode during the milling process
CAUTION
Milling process
The sleep mode of the PC must not be activated during the milling process.
13.2.4
Changing the font size
If the text is not completely visible in a dialog, in the window "Display Properties" / "Large Fonts" must be set. By right-clicking the background, in
the window "Display Properties" / "Appearance" / "Font Size" you can set
to "Normal" .
13.2.5
Screen saver
Display errors can occur when the screen saver opens. If this is the case,
deactivate the screen saver.
13.2.6
Task Manager
Display errors can occur when you open the Task Manager
(Ctrl+Alt+Del). If this is the case, exit and restart the inLab 3D program.
13.2.7
Correlation quality
You can check the correlation quality by displaying the occlusal impression ("Window"/"Display options"). The preparation area and occlusion
area are displayed as a "spotty" pattern in overlapping image regions.
13.3 Service program
✔ The inLab 3D program is installed.
➢ Start the service program in the inLab program group by clicking
"Start"/"Programs"/"inLab"/"Service" .
Service dialog
CAUTION
Service functions
The service functions are exclusively for use by authorized inLab service engineers.
260
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Tips and Tricks
Operator's manual
This program area can be accessed only by authorized technical personnel with a service password.
● With the Yes button, you confirm the service password.
● Use the "No" button to quit the service program.
● Using the "Maintenance only" button, you can also perform a water
change of the milling unit without having to enter a service password
(also see the Operating Instructions for the milling unit).
13.4 Frequently Asked Questions
13.4.1
Database connection
The tooth number specified by the inLab entries (code “VC”) is not converted in S(V)IDEXIS when the U.S. odontogram is used.
13.4.2
Minimizing the program
The inLab 3D program cannot be minimized during the milling process.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
261
infiniDent Upload tool
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Function of Upload tool
Operator's manual
14
infiniDent Upload tool
14.1 Function of Upload tool
Using the Upload tool, you can automatically send fully designed restorations to the infiniDent Web Portal. The program runs in the background
mode, thus enabling you to continue designing at the same time.
The data are loaded into the shopping cart of the web portal. Then you
have to return to the web portal to confirm the shopping cart.
At the same time, you can also check the status of any work you have ordered from infiniDent with the Upload tool. Each time you go online, the
program polls the current status of your order.
The chief prerequisite for using the tool is that the computer on which you
are operating the inLab 3D software is connected to the Internet.
14.2 Installing the Upload tool
1. Insert the software CD in the CD/DVD drive.
2. If the installation program starts automatically, cancel it.
3. Start the Windows Explorer and select the CD/DVD drive.
4. Open the "infiniDent" folder in the "Misc" directory.
5. Run the infinidentUpload Setup.exe file.
6. Then follow the instructions given by the installation program.
7. After a successful installation, you will find an icon for starting the
Upload tool on your desktop.
NOTICE
Starting the tool via the Start menu
You can also start the Upload tool via "Start"/"Programs"/"inLab"/"infiniDent".
14.3 Description of the user interface
The Upload tools is subdivided into three areas:
● A: Menu bar
● B: Tool bar
● C: Overview window
262
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
infiniDent Upload tool
Operator's manual
14.3.1
Menu bar
Via the menu option "File" you can select various "Settings" for the
Upload tool or close the program.
empty
Settings
If you select "Settings" , you can set the following parameters for the
Upload tool:
Under "General" you can choose:
● between having all orders ready for shipment sent automatically or
just sending them manually whenever you like by clicking the Send
icon.
● whether orders with the status "finished“ which have been reported
by the web portal should automatically be cleared from the overview
window.
Under "Internet connection" you can choose:
● the internet connection you work with.
● if you work with a dialed connection, you can automatically connect
to and disconnect from the program.
14.3.2
Tool bar
The buttons on the tool bar have the following functionalities:
● "Send"button
Click here if you would like to send your orders to the web portal.
● "Refresh status"button
Click here to update the status of your orders.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
263
infiniDent Upload tool
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Preparing files for uploading
Operator's manual
● "Recycle Bin"button
Click here to clear all previously marked orders from the overview
window.
● "infiniDent"button
Click here to go directly to the infiniDent web portal.
14.3.3
Overview window
The overview window contains all of the orders you would like to send or
are currently being processed by infiniDent.
The columns "First name", "Family name", "Tooth", "Material", "Date" are
automatically copied from the data in the restoration file.
In the "Hue" column you can select a color for all the materials for which
this is possible (SIRONA inCoris ZI, VITA In-Ceram SPINELL, ALUMINA
and ZIRCONIA).
In the "Infiltrate" column you can indicate whether these materials are to
be infiltrated or uninfiltrated.
The "Status" column always shows you the current status of your orders
at infiniDent. If you have Internet access, you can update the status via
the "Refresh status"button.
14.4 Preparing files for uploading
Once you have completed the design, click the "Send"button in the tool
bar in the inLab 3D software.
The restoration file is then automatically converted to the idt format and
sent to the infiniDent Upload tool. Start the Upload tool.
You will find the restoration file in the overview window of the Upload tool.
If you have selected SIRONA inCoris ZI, VITA In-Ceram SPINELL, ALUMINA or ZIRCONIA, you will also be prompted to specify a color and whether you would like to have the work done in infiltrated or uninfiltrated
form.
Select the color by clicking the drop-down arrow in the "Hue" column next
to the relevant file in the overview window. Now you can select the color
from the drop-down menu for the corresponding material.
264
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
infiniDent Upload tool
Operator's manual
In the "Infiltrate" column, choose whether you would like to order the work
in infiltrated or in uninfiltrated form. If a check mark is placed in the box,
the framework will be infiltrated; if no checkmark is placed there, you will
receive the framework in uninfiltrated form.
14.5 Confirming the shopping cart
As soon as you have uploaded the restoration with the Upload tool, it is
placed in your personal shopping cart at the infiniDent web portal.
Click the "infiniDent" icon for this purpose. You will be guided directly to
the home page of the infiniDent web portal. There you can enter your user
data. Click the "Shopping cart" in your personal area. Then click the
"SEND" button to place the orders.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
265
CEREC Connect
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Introduction
Operator's manual
15
CEREC Connect
15.1 Introduction
This software, used in combination with the CEREC Connect portal, also
allows you to have the physical model produced via infiniDent, Sirona's
production center. This means that you can now also offer your CEREC
dentists veneer crowns and bridges on the basis of the digital impression.
15.2 E-mail notification of new orders
You will be notified by e-mail whenever a CEREC dentist with whom you
work via CEREC Connect submits a new digital impression.
15.3 Starting the inLab 3D program
If the inLab 3D program is not open yet, this can be done as follows:
✔ The inLab 3D software is installed. The inLab 3D button is located on
Starting the software
the desktop.
➢ Start the inLab 3D software by double-clicking the inLab 3D button.
or
➢ Click "Start" / "Programs" / "inLab 3D" / "inLab 3D".
15.4 Registration
To enable you to work with your CEREC dentists via CEREC Connect,
you have to register on the CEREC Connect portal. You require an e-mail
address to register.
NOTICE
Laboratories receive an access code only after they have been authorized by Sirona.
15.4.1
Registering via the website
1. Open an internet browser and go to www.CEREC-Connect.com.
2. Click the button marked "Laboratory Registration"in the menu navigation.
ª The laboratory registration home page then opens.
Registration
NOTICE
Fields marked *
Fields marked with an asterisk (*) must be filled in.
1. Select "User ID" and click "Next".
2. Enter the laboratory data and click "Next".
3. Enter the contact person data and click "Next".
4. Select the "Offerings" / "Services" offered by you and click "Next".
266
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
CEREC Connect
Operator's manual
ª On completing registration successfully, you will receive an email stating your access data for the portal.
15.4.2
Registration via the inLab 3D program
✔ The inLab 3D program is opened.
1. On the tool bar, click the button marked "Connect".
2. In the login window click the button marked "Registration".
ª The laboratory registration home page then opens.
Registration
NOTICE
Fields marked *
Fields marked with an asterisk (*) must be filled in.
1. Select "User ID" and click "Next".
2. Enter the laboratory data and click "Next".
3. Enter the contact person data and click "Next".
4. Select the "Offerings" / "Services" offered by you and click "Next".
ª On completing registration successfully, you will receive an email stating your access data for the portal.
15.5 Connecting to the CEREC Connect portal
✔ The inLab 3D program is opened.
1. On the tool bar, click the icon marked "Connect".
2. Enter the access data from the e-mail you received after following
successful registration in the login window.
3. Click on "OK".
ª The CEREC Connect portal opens.
15.6 CEREC Connect portal
15.6.1
Introduction
The portal features tab-based control for summarizing complex topics.
The following tab pages are available:
● "Order List",
● "Restoration Data",
● "Desired Lab",
● "Additional Notes",
● "Accept/Reject Order"
Once you have opened an order, you can move freely between tab pages
by clicking on them. The portal always starts with the tab page "Order
List". You can close the portal and log out automatically by clicking the
"Close" button at the end of the page.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
267
CEREC Connect
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
CEREC Connect portal
Operator's manual
15.6.2
"Order list" tab
The "Order List" tab page contains all the orders from your dentists.
➢ Click on "View" to start the evaluation of the relevant order.
empty
Drop-down menu "Show"
You can change or sort how the orders appear in the list via the "Show"
drop-down menu:
● "New orders only" only show new orders.
● "Accepted orders only" only show accepted orders.
● "Rejected orders only" only show rejected orders.
empty
Description of status symbols:
New order
Accepted order
Rejected order
15.6.3
"Restoration data" tab
Restoration data information
The "Restoration Data" tab contains all the information about the restoration. The tab is divided into three sections.
● "Patient"
● "Restoration"
● "US Tooth Number(s)"
empty
Patient
This section contains the first and last names of the patient.
empty
Restoration
This section contains the following:
● "Restoration Type"
● "Material"
● "Stump Shade"
● "Final Shade"
empty
US Tooth Number(s)
This section shows the tooth/teeth being restored in a bridge.
Next step arrow
Click the "Next step" arrow to proceed to the next tab.
268
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
CEREC Connect
Operator's manual
15.6.4
"Laboratory" tab
Your laboratory appears in the "Desired Lab" tab as the preferred lab,
along with the date and time by which the restoration has to have been
returned to the dental practice.
Next step arrow
Click the "Next step" arrow to proceed to the next tab.
Previous step arrow
Click the "Previous step" arrow to go back to the previous tab.
15.6.5
"More information" tab
The "Additional Notes" tab consists of three sections:
● "Notes"
● "Additional Patient Data"
● "Photos"
empty
Notes
This section contains additional notes and information from the dentist.
empty
Additional Patient Data
This section contains details about the person's gender and age.
empty
Photos
Here you can download additional photos which the dentist has also sent,
e.g., taken with an intraoral camera).
Next step arrow
Click the "Next step" arrow to proceed to the next tab.
Previous step arrow
Click the "Previous step" arrow to go back to the previous tab.
15.6.6
"Accept/reject" tab
The "Accept/Reject Order" tab consists of three sections, as well as the
"Reject" and "Accept" buttons. In order to decide whether to accept or reject the order, you have to review the digital impression first. To do this,
download the data record and open it in the inLab 3D software (see "Reviewing and designing a restoration in the inLab 3D software [ ➙ 271]").
NOTICE
Rejected orders can be subsequently accepted at any time and a model
can be ordered for this purpose.
empty
Fragment order data
Order Data
The order details are summarized under "Order Data". In the "Attachment
Preview" column you can download the accompanying document and the
data record of the digital impression.
When you click on the "Work Ticket" link, the Windows download window
appears and you can view and save the accompanying sheet to your
computer.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
269
CEREC Connect
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
CEREC Connect portal
Operator's manual
For downloading the digital impression and the subsequent design, read
"Reviewing and designing a restoration in the inLab 3D software [➙ 271]".
empty
Dentist
This box shows the dentist's delivery address.
empty
Your comments
You can enter your comments about the restoration in this box (in case
you reject the order, for example.)
empty
"Reject" button
When you reject an order via the "Reject" button, an e-mail is sent to your
dentist including your comments as to why you have rejected the order.
You then automatically advance to the next page. Click "Go back to your
order list" to review the next order.
empty
"Accept" button
If you confirm acceptance of an order by clicking "Accept", an e-mail containing your comments is sent to the dentist. You automatically advance
to the next page. Once again, you are given the opportunity here to save
the accompanying document and data record on your computer and, if
necessary, to order the physical model from infiniDent.
empty
"You accepted the order" fragment
"You accepted the order" page
If you haven't downloaded the accompanying document and the digital
impression yet, you can do so here under "You accepted the order" (also
refer to "Order data [ ➙ 269]").
➢ Download the data for your records here.
If you do not require a model to produce the restoration, click on "Go back
to your order list" to review the next order or click on "Close" to exit the
portal.
If you require a model to produce the restoration, you can order it here by
clicking the "Order model" button.
empty
"Forward to infiniDent" page
If you accept the preparation margin drawn by the dentist, you can then
click the "Submit" button directly to order the model from infiniDent.
If you still wish to draw the preparation margin or change it during the review of the impression, click "Browse". Browse through the Windows Explorer to the folder where you have saved the file and double-click the file
in question. Then click "Submit".
Your infiniDent shopping basket is now opened in a new browser window.
NOTICE
Preparation margin
Based on the preparation margin drawn by the dentist or by you, infiniDent can expose the preparation margins in stumps (see also "Preparation margin for infiniDent models [ ➙ 273]").
270
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
CEREC Connect
Operator's manual
15.6.7
infiniDent shopping basket
The infiniDent shopping basket contains the details for ordering the models.
empty
Ordering a model
➢ If you would like to order only one model, click the "Submit" button to
finish ordering.
empty
Ordering more than one model
1. If you would like to order further models, click the "LOGOFF" button.
2. Then close the browser window.
3. Then open the next order in the "Order List" tab.
4. Once you have placed all models in the shopping cart, click on "Submit" to finish ordering.
15.7 Reviewing and designing a restoration in the
inLab 3D software
Before designing a restoration on the basis of the digital impression received from the dentist, you have to ascertain whether the data available is
adequate and free of artifacts, for example. Therefore, you have to open
the data record in the inLab 3D software.
15.7.1
Assessing the order
✔ CEREC Connect has been started.
✔ "Order Data" is selected in the "Accept/Reject Order" tab.
1. Click on the link of the digital impression.
ª The inLab 3D software automatically starts with the step "Check
order". Here you can view the dentist's impressions of the preparation, the partial bite and the antagonist.
2. Now decide whether there is adequate data available, whether the
bite is correct, etc. in order to design the restoration.
ª If the dentist has marked the preparation margin, it appears as a
magenta-colored line. If he has not, there no line shown.
3. Click on the "Next" icon to return to the "Accept/Reject Order" tab in
the CEREC Connect Portal, where you can now accept or reject the
order.
ª The data record remains open in the background, thus enabling
you to start designing the restoration as soon as you close the
CEREC Connect Portal.
4. Select a patient from the list or create a new patient by clicking the
"New" button.
5. In the next step ("Connect order change"), you confirm the restoration
type, design technique and tooth number by clicking "OK".
6. If necessary, you also can make changes in the presettings and then
confirm them with "OK".
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
271
CEREC Connect
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Reviewing and designing a restoration in the inLab 3D software
15.7.2
Operator's manual
Preparation margin
empty
Applying the preparation margin
✔ The dentist has drawn the preparation margin. It appears in the form
of a magenta-colored line.
➢ Double-click the line to confirm and then click the "Next" icon to proceed to the next step.
empty
Changing the preparation margin
✔ The dentist has drawn the preparation margin. It appears in the form
of a magenta-colored line.
1. If you wish to change the preparation margin, double-click the line.
ª The line is shown in blue.
2. Change the preparation margin as required (see "Entering the preparation margin [ ➙ 135]").
3. Click the "Next" icon to proceed to the next step.
empty
Entering a new preparation margin
✔ The dentist has not drawn a preparation margin.
272
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
CEREC Connect
Operator's manual
1. Enter the preparation margin (see "Entering the preparation margin
[ ➙ 135]").
2. Once you have completed the preparation margin, click the "Next"
icon to proceed to the next step.
15.7.3
Ordering models with a drawn in or modified preparation
margin
1. After you have drawn in or changed the preparation margin, click on
"Restoration" in the menu bar and select the "Export…" option. Save
the data record.
2. The click on the "Connect" icon to access the CEREC Connect portal.
3. Click on the "Show" link next to the order for which you want to order
the model.
4. In the "Accept/Reject Order" tab page, click on "Order model".
5. On the next page, click on "Browse", navigate to the folder in which
you previously saved the data record, and select the data record.
6. Select the model option and click "Prescription".
15.7.4
Designing a restoration
➢ Design the restoration by using the "Design" tools (see "Design window [ ➙ 37]“).
15.8 Preparation margin for infiniDent models
The preparation margin is very important for crown stumps and bridge abutments. If the preparation margin is drawn, infiniDent can expose the
preparation margins when the models are produced.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
273
CEREC Connect
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Administration
Operator's manual
Stump without an exposed preparation margin
Stump with an exposed preparation margin
15.9 Administration
If you click the two cogwheels in the top right-hand corner of the inLab 3D
portal, you can edit the following user data on the portal:
Administration
● Passwords
● Phone numbers
● E-mail addresses,
15.10 Quadrant cases from CEREC Connect with inLab
3D
15.10.1
Introduction
Introduction to quadrant restoration
CEREC Connect software can be used to produce both single-tooth and
multiple restorations (quadrants). For these cases, a specific workflow
must be observed, which is described in the following.
The following example shows a typical quadrant case. A dentist has
made an optical impression of an inlay and two crowns (anterior and posterior tooth crowns) on one jaw, and sent it to your laboratory.
1. Open the inLab 3D software.
274
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
CEREC Connect
Operator's manual
2. Click the "Connect" icon to log on to the portal.
15.10.2
First restoration. Inlay
empty
Portal
In the "Order list" you will see 3 new orders (7932, 7933, 7934). The small
chain symbols indicate that this is a quadrant case.
The first order of this quadrant case does not have a chain symbol (in this
case 7932), which indicates that this is the first restoration of the case.
The next order with the chain symbol is the second restoration in the case
(7933), and the final order with the chain symbol is the third restoration in
the quadrant case (7934).
1. Click on the "View" link next to the first restoration to display the order
data.
2. Click on "Next step" to view the order data in the individual tab pages.
3. After you have checked the order data, click on the "Accept/Reject
Order" tab page.
4. Click on the "*.cdt" data record under "Attachment Preview" to download the data record to the inLab 3D software for checking.
ª The data record is automatically loaded into the inLab 3D software.
empty
Viewing/checking
✔ In the inLab 3D software, you are now in the step "Check order".
1. View the order and decide whether you want to accept or reject the
order.
2. Then click on the "Next" icon in the inLab 3D software.
empty
Accepting an order
✔ You have returned to the portal.
1. Click on "Accept" to continue.
ª You are automatically forwarded to the next page, where you can
order the model.
2. Ensure that either you or the dentist have drawn the preparation margins. infiniDent can then expose the preparation margins at the
stumps. You receive a model and each stump once with an exposed
preparation margin and once with a gingival section.
3. Click on "Close" to return to the inLab 3D software.
empty
Select a patient
➢ Click the "Next" icon in the inLab 3D software to select a patient or
create a new patient.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
275
CEREC Connect
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Quadrant cases from CEREC Connect with inLab 3D
Operator's manual
empty
Design - Change
✔ The "New" dialog is displayed. The restoration type, design technique
and tooth number are copied from the information from the Web portal.
➢ If you do not want to make any changes, click on "OK".
empty
Design
1. Enter the preparation margin or, if the dentist has already done so,
confirm the preparation margin by double-clicking on the line. You
can still change this again if necessary.
2. Then click on the "Next" icon and design the inlay as usual.
empty
Design/Quadrant
✔ The inlay is designed and is located in the milling preview.
➢ In the "Design" menu, select the menu option "Quadrant…".
ª The CEREC Connect portal opens automatically.
ª At the same time, a further inLab 3D program is opened with the inlay
you have just designed, which you can now mill.
15.10.3
Second restoration. Posterior tooth crown
✔ In the portal, the first order (7932) is now displayed with a green
check mark.
1. Click on the "View" link next to the second restoration (7933) to display the order data.
2. Proceed in the same way as for the first order:
● Download and evaluate the data record.
● Accept the order.
● Select a patient.
● Design - Change.
● Design the posterior tooth crown (ensure that the previously designed inlay is virtually seated). Design the crown up to the milling preview.
● Select "Design" / "Quadrant…". The CEREC Connect portal opens
automatically. At the same time, a further inLab 3D program is opened with the posterior tooth crown you have just designed, which you
can now mill.
276
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
CEREC Connect
Operator's manual
15.10.4
Third restoration: Anterior tooth crown
✔ In the portal, the first two orders (7932, 7933) are now displayed with
a green check mark.
1. Click on the "View" link next to the third restoration (7934) to display
the order data.
2. Proceed in the same way as for the previous two orders:
● Download and evaluate the data record.
● Accept the order.
● Select a patient.
● Design - Change.
● Design the anterior tooth crown (ensure that the inlay and posterior
tooth crown are virtually seated). Design the crown up to the milling
preview and mill it.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
277
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Operator's manual
Glossary
3D Preview
After you trigger the optical impression, the measurement data are
displayed 3-dimensionally.
3D viewer
Main window
Angled optical impressions
Additional optical impressions of the same area with a maximum permissible tilt angle of 20°.
Antagonist image
Optical impression of the centric bite registration.
Cut
Cut window/tool for placing a cut plane through the restoration/preparation.
Design
Window with design tools used for editing the restoration.
Drop
Tool (button) for activating/deactivating the “wax drop” function with
which material can be applied and smoothed drop by drop. Toggling
with the space bar.
Edit
Tool (button) for activating/deactivating the editing function which can
be used to modify design lines.
Form
Tool (button) for activating/deactivating the "form" function with which
material can be applied and smoothed layer by layer. Toggling with
the space bar.
Gingival line
The gingival line defines the emergence profile of the implant abutment. It is the final line/transition line to the supraconstruction.
Image catalog
Window for managing the image fields (preparation, occlusion and
antagonist)
Image field
One or more optical impressions of the preparation, of the occlusion
or of the antagonist impression.
Insertion axis
The direction of view of the camera / scanner (occlusal aspect) must
agree with the insertion axis of the restoration.
278
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Operator's manual
Intensity image
Window for more accurately drawing the cervical segments of the
preparation margin in epigingival areas. You can activate the intensity image with the spacebar while entering the preparation margin.
Occlusal optical impression
Optical impression of an existing or waxed-up occlusion.
Position
Positioning tool for moving the entire restoration in different directions.
Reference optical impression
First optical impression that determines the original insertion axis.
Rotate
Rotation tool for rotating the entire restoration about different axes.
Scale
Tool (button) for activating/deactivating the scaling function which
can be used to scale selected regions.
Shape
Tool (button) for activating/deactivating the shaping function which
can be used to apply, remove and smooth material.
Single optical impression
A single optical impression that must be taken in the occlusal direction (insertion axis).
Softguard dongle
Plug that is connected to the parallel port or the USB port of the PC
and enables different milling options.
Status bar
Bar at the bottom of the screen which displays current information.
Supplementary optical impressions
Several optical impressions that also image the mesial and distal
neighbors.
Tool bar
Symbols (“icons”) which can be used to access important program
functions.
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
279
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Operator's manual
Index
Numerics
C
3D preview
Calibration, 89
Delete scans, 126
3D Preview, 91
Camera support, 111
Color scheme, 130
Design, 123
Configuration, 80
3D viewer, 26
Connect to database, 156
3D-Viewer, 54
Connectors, 41
A
Consistency check, 157
Abutment coping, 40
Administering patient data
Change, 61
Construction line, 39
Contact, 31
Contact surface to neighboring tooth
Contact surface to neighboring tooth, 31
Deletion, 61
Aluminum oxide, 152
Angled optical impressions, 113
Antagonist, 34
coordinate plane, 54
Cursor, 91
Cusp Settling, 36
Cut, 31
Scanning, 106
Showing/hiding, 33
D
Tools, 36
Database export, 156
Trimming, 132
Database import, 156
Antagonist surface, 35
Delete scans, 121, 126
Archiving data, 156
Design, 62, 131
Articulation, 32
Center, 65
Artifacts, 66
Change, 63
B
Drop, 43
Edit, 38
Base line, 135
Form, 42
Bluecam
Acquisition control, 109
Insertion axis, 66
Quadrant, 63
Scale, 44
Design lines
Colors, 39
Design window, 37
Display height image, 122
Display options, 90
Distance, 91
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
280
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Index
Operator's manual
E
M
Editing function, 38
Manage patient data, 60
Entering the preparation margin, 135
Managing patient data
F
New, 60
Form tool, 42
Manual
html format, 19
G
pdf format, 19
Gingival line, 137
Material selection, 144
Gingival mask, 32
Menu bar, 55
H
Milling, 154
Help, 92, 92
Hiding/showing the neighboring teeth
Trim, 30
I
Milling preview, 145
Milling process, 150
O
Occlusion, 32
image
Veneer, 115
Scanning, 107
Optical impression, 111
Antagonist, 114
Image catalog, 91, 117
End teeth, 114
Active region, 120
Changing the allocation, 121
Quadrant restoration, 114
Close, 122
P
Delete scans, 121
Pontic, 40
Design, 119
Position, 50
Open, 118
Zooming in, 121
Image field, 116
Occlusion, 32
image regions
hiding, 131
Image regions
Delete, 140
inEos, 101
inLab gearhead, 82
insertion axis
Redefining the , 139
Interocclusal Clearance, 34
281
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Operator's manual
R
S
Recycle bin, 121, 127
Safety information, 18
Redefining the reference optical impression, 120
Scale, 54
Reduce, 50, 230
Scaling tool (scale), 44
Reference optical impression, 110
Scanning procedure, 105
Registering models, 128
Settings, 66
restoration
Instruments, 78
export, 59
Parameter, 67
import, 59
Settling, 36
Manage patient data, 60
Shape, 48
Restoration, 55
Single optical impression, 110
administer patient data, 56
Slider, 42, 43
delete, 55
Softguard, 93
Delete, 58
Softguard dongle, 24, 258
exit, 56
Software
export, 56
Installation, 22
import, 56
Uninstallation, 24
load, 55
Version, 23
loading, 58
Stack milling, 153
New, 55
Standard views, 29
save, 56
Status bar, 53
save as..., 56
Supplementary optical impressions, 112
send to, 56
T
Send to, 62
Restoration files, 157
Rotate, 52
Tool bar, 27
U
Buccal image, 129
User interface, 26
preparation and antagonist, 128
V
Rotational scan, 122
View window, 29, 37
Virtual grinding, 36
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23
05.2011
282
Sirona Dental Systems GmbH
Index
Operator's manual
W
Wax drops (Drop), 43
WaxUp, 108
window
Distance, 91
Window, 90
Cursor, 91
Image catalog, 91
Z
Zirconia, 152
Zoom, 30
283
63 33 616 D 3344
D 3344.208.06.13.23 05.2011
tÉ=êÉëÉêîÉ=íÜÉ=êáÖÜí=íç=ã~âÉ=~åó=~äíÉê~íáçåë=ïÜáÅÜ=ã~ó=ÄÉ=êÉèìáêÉÇ=ÇìÉ=íç=íÉÅÜåáÅ~ä=áãéêçîÉãÉåíëK
«=páêçå~=aÉåí~ä=póëíÉãë=dãÄe=OMNMJOMNN
a=PPQQKOMUKMSKNPKOP MRKOMNN
péê~ÅÜÉW ÉåÖäáëÅÜ=ErpF
ûKJkêKW= NNQ=NSM
mêáåíÉÇ=áå=dÉêã~åó
páêçå~=aÉåí~ä=póëíÉãë=dãÄe
áå=íÜÉ=rp^W
c~Äêáâëíê~≈É=PN
SQSOR=_ÉåëÜÉáã
dÉêã~åó
ïïïKëáêçå~KÅçã
páêçå~=aÉåí~ä=póëíÉãë=ii`
QUPR=páêçå~=aêáîÉI=pìáíÉ=NMM
`Ü~êäçííÉI=k`=OUOTP
rp^
lêÇÉê=kç
SP=PP=SNS=a=PPQQ